7 Navnet Vx2 Operators Manual

IMPORTANT NOTICES
General
• The operator of this equipment must read and follow the descriptions in this manual.
Wrong operation or maintenance can cancel the warranty or cause injury.
• Do not copy any part of this manual without written permission from FURUNO.
• If this manual is lost or worn, contact your dealer about replacement.
• The contents of this manual and equipment specifications can change without notice.
• The example screens (or illustrations) shown in this manual can be different from the
screens you see on your display. The screens you see depend on your system
configuration and equipment settings.
• Save this manual for future reference.
• Any modification of the equipment (including software) by persons not authorized by
FURUNO will cancel the warranty.
• All brand and product names are trademarks, registered trademarks or service marks of
their respective holders.
How to discard this product

Discard this product according to local regulations for the disposal of industrial waste. For
disposal in the USA, see the homepage of the Electronics Industries Alliance
(http://www.eiae.org/) for the correct method of disposal.
How to discard a used battery

Some FURUNO products have a battery(ies). To see if your product has a battery, see the
chapter on Maintenance. Follow the instructions below if a battery is used. Tape the + and -
terminals of battery before disposal to prevent fire, heat generation caused by short circuit.
In the European Union
The crossed-out trash can symbol indicates that all types of
batteries must not be discarded in standard trash, or at a trash site.
Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to your
national legislation and the Batteries Directive 2006/66/EU.
Cd
In the USA
The Mobius loop symbol (three chasing arrows) indicates that
Ni-Cd and lead-acid rechargeable batteries must be recycled.
Take the used batteries to a battery collection site according to
local laws. Ni-Cd Pb
In the other countries
There are no international standards for the battery recycle symbol. The number of symbols
can increase when the other countries make their own recycling symbols in the future.
i
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
WARNING WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD Radio Frequency
Do not open the equipment. Radiation Hazard
Only qualified personnel The radar antenna emits electromagnetic
should work inside the radio frequency (RF) energy which can be
equipment. harmful, particularly to your eyes. Never
look directly into the antenna aperture from
Turn off the radar power a close distance while the radar is in
switch before servicing the operation or expose yourself to the trans-
antenna unit. Post a warn- mitting antenna at a close distance.
ing sign near the switch
indicating it should not be Distances at which RF radiation levels of
turned on while the antenna 100 and 10 W/m2 exist are given in the
unit is being serviced. table below.
Prevent the potential risk of Note: If the antenna unit is installed at a

being struck by the rotating close distance in front of the wheel house,
antenna and exposure to your administration may require halt of
RF radiation hazard. transmission within a certain sector of
antenna revolution. This is possible - Ask
Wear a safety belt and hard your FURUNO representative or dealer to
hat when working on the provide this feature.
antenna unit.
Distance to Distance to
Serious injury or death can MODEL 100 W/m2 10 W/m2
result if someone falls from point point
the radar antenna mast. MODEL Worst case
1824C Nil
0.50 m
Do not disassemble or modify the Worst case
MODEL Nil
equipment. 1834C 1.80 m
MODEL Worst case Worst case
Fire, electrical shock or serious injury can 1934C 0.20 m 3.00 m
result. Worst case
MODEL
1944C Nil 2.50 m
Turn off the power immediately if water Worst case
MODEL XN-12A
leaks into the equipment or the equip- 1954C
2.50 m
Nil Worst case
ment is emitting smoke or fire. XN-13A
2.30 m
Continued use of the equipment can cause

fire or electrical shock.
Warning Label
Use the proper fuse. A warning label is attached to the
equipment. Do not remove the label.
Fuse rating is shown on the power cable. If the label is missing or damaged,
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage contact a FURUNO agent or dealer.
to the equipment.
WARNING Name: Warning Label (1)
To avoid electrical shock, do not Type: 86-003-1011-0
Keep heater away from equipment. remove cover. No user-serviceable Code No.: 100-236-230
parts inside.
Heat can alter equipment shape and melt

the power cord, which can cause fire or
electrical shock.
ii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
FOREWORD................................................................................................................. viii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS........................................................................................ ix
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW ................................................................................. 1-1

1.1 Operating Controls ............................................................................................................. 1-1
1.1.1 Display unit controls ............................................................................................... 1-1
1.1.2 Remote controller ................................................................................................... 1-3
1.2 Inserting a Chart Card ........................................................................................................ 1-4
1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off ...................................................................................................... 1-5
1.4 Display Brilliance, Panel Brilliance, Hue............................................................................. 1-6
1.4.1 Display brilliance, panel brilliance .......................................................................... 1-6
1.4.2 Hue......................................................................................................................... 1-7
1.5 Selecting a Display............................................................................................................. 1-8
1.5.1 Display modes........................................................................................................ 1-8
1.5.2 Selecting a display ................................................................................................. 1-9
1.5.3 Switching control in combination and overlay screens......................................... 1-10
1.5.4 Selecting image source.........................................................................................1-11
1.6 Cursor pad, Cursor ........................................................................................................... 1-12
1.7 Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as Destination ..................................................... 1-13
1.8 Data Boxes ....................................................................................................................... 1-14
1.8.1 Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key ............................................................ 1-14
1.8.2 Rearranging data boxes ....................................................................................... 1-14
1.8.3 Temporarily erasing a data box ............................................................................ 1-14
1.9 Function Keys................................................................................................................... 1-15
1.10 Simulation Display............................................................................................................ 1-16
2. RADAR OPERATION ............................................................................................ 2-1

2.1 Radar Display ..................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.2 Transmitting, Stand-by........................................................................................................ 2-2
2.3 Tuning................................................................................................................................. 2-2
2.4 Adjusting the Gain .............................................................................................................. 2-2
2.5 Reducing Sea Clutter ......................................................................................................... 2-3
2.5.1 How the A/C SEA works......................................................................................... 2-3
2.5.2 Adjusting the A/C SEA ........................................................................................... 2-4
2.6 Reducing Precipitation Clutter............................................................................................ 2-4
2.7 Range Scale ....................................................................................................................... 2-5
2.8 Pulselength......................................................................................................................... 2-6
2.9 Presentation Mode ............................................................................................................. 2-7
2.9.1 Selecting a presentation mode............................................................................... 2-7
2.9.2 Description of presentation modes......................................................................... 2-8
2.10 Measuring the Range ......................................................................................................... 2-9
2.10.1 Measuring range by range rings ............................................................................ 2-9
2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor .................................................................................... 2-9
2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM .................................................................................... 2-10
2.10.4 Various VRM operations........................................................................................ 2-10
2.11 Measuring the Bearing ......................................................................................................2-11
2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor.................................................................................2-11
2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL....................................................................................2-11
2.11.3 Various EBL operations ..........................................................................................2-11
2.12 Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker .......................................................................... 2-12
iii
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2.13 Reducing Noise Interference.............................................................................................2-12

2.14 Rejecting Radar Interference ............................................................................................2-13
2.15 Zoom .................................................................................................................................2-14
2.15.1 Zooming radar targets...........................................................................................2-14
2.15.2 Zooming ARP, TTM targets ...................................................................................2-14
2.16 Shifting the Picture ............................................................................................................2-15
2.16.1 Manual shift...........................................................................................................2-15
2.16.2 Automatic shift.......................................................................................................2-15
2.17 Using the Offset EBL.........................................................................................................2-16
2.17.1 Predicting collision course.....................................................................................2-16
2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing between two targets..................................................2-17
2.18 Echo Trails.........................................................................................................................2-18
2.18.1 Trail time................................................................................................................2-18
2.18.2 Starting echo trails.................................................................................................2-19
2.18.3 Trail gradation .......................................................................................................2-20
2.18.4 Trail color...............................................................................................................2-20
2.19 Echo Stretch ......................................................................................................................2-21
2.20 Echo Averaging .................................................................................................................2-22
2.21 Outputting TLL Data ..........................................................................................................2-23
2.22 Guard Alarm ......................................................................................................................2-24
2.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone ...................................................................................2-24
2.22.2 When the alarm is violated… ................................................................................2-25
2.22.3 Cancelling the guard alarm ...................................................................................2-25
2.23 Watchman .........................................................................................................................2-25
2.23.1 How watchman works ...........................................................................................2-25
2.23.2 Turning on/off watchman.......................................................................................2-26
2.23.3 Setting watchman stand-by interval ......................................................................2-26
2.24 Waypoint Marker ...............................................................................................................2-27
2.25 ARP, TTM Operation .........................................................................................................2-28
2.25.1 Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM .........................................................................2-29
2.25.2 Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP)....................................................................2-29
2.25.3 Displaying target number (ARP, TTM) ..................................................................2-31
2.25.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets......................................................................2-31
2.25.5 Setting vector attributes (ARP)..............................................................................2-32
2.25.6 Displaying past position (ARP)..............................................................................2-33
2.25.7 ARP, TTM target data............................................................................................2-34
2.25.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP) ........................................................................................2-35
2.25.9 Lost target alarm (ARP) ........................................................................................2-36
2.26 Interpreting the Radar Display ..........................................................................................2-37
2.26.1 False echoes.........................................................................................................2-37
2.26.2 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder) ............................................................2-38
2.26.3 Racon (Radar Beacon) .........................................................................................2-39
3. PLOTTER OPERATION.........................................................................................3-1
3.1 Plotter Displays ...................................................................................................................3-1
3.1.1 Full-screen plotter display .......................................................................................3-1
3.1.2 Nav graphic display.................................................................................................3-3
3.1.3 Highway display ......................................................................................................3-6
3.1.4 Nav data display......................................................................................................3-7
3.2 Presentation Mode ..............................................................................................................3-8
3.3 Shifting the Display..............................................................................................................3-9
3.4 Chart Scale..........................................................................................................................3-9
3.5 Chart Cards .........................................................................................................................3-9
3.5.1 Chart card overview ................................................................................................3-9
3.5.2 Indices and chart enlargement..............................................................................3-10
3.5.3 Navionics charts....................................................................................................3-11
iv
TABLE OF CONTENTS
3.5.4 C-MAP charts ....................................................................................................... 3-14

3.6 Working with Track ........................................................................................................... 3-18
3.6.1 Displaying track .................................................................................................... 3-18
3.6.2 Stopping, restarting plotting of own ship track...................................................... 3-19
3.6.3 Changing track color ............................................................................................ 3-19
3.6.4 Track plotting method and interval for own ship track.......................................... 3-20
3.6.5 Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting............................................... 3-21
3.6.6 Erasing track ........................................................................................................ 3-22
3.7 Marks, Lines ..................................................................................................................... 3-24
3.7.1 Entering a mark, line ............................................................................................ 3-24
3.7.2 Changing mark attributes ..................................................................................... 3-24
3.7.3 Selecting line type ................................................................................................ 3-25
3.7.4 Erasing marks, lines............................................................................................. 3-26
3.8 Waypoints......................................................................................................................... 3-27
3.8.1 Entering waypoints ............................................................................................... 3-27
3.8.2 Editing waypoint data ........................................................................................... 3-30
3.8.3 Erasing waypoints ................................................................................................ 3-32
3.8.4 Changing waypoint mark size (Navionics GOLD) ................................................ 3-33
3.8.5 Searching waypoints ............................................................................................ 3-34
3.9 Routes .............................................................................................................................. 3-35
3.9.1 Creating routes..................................................................................................... 3-35
3.9.2 Connecting routes ................................................................................................ 3-38
3.9.3 Inserting waypoints............................................................................................... 3-39
3.9.4 Removing waypoints from a route........................................................................ 3-40
3.9.5 Erasing routes ...................................................................................................... 3-41
3.10 Navigation ........................................................................................................................ 3-41
3.10.1 Navigating to a “quick point”................................................................................. 3-41
3.10.2 Navigating to waypoints ....................................................................................... 3-42
3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services......................................................................... 3-43
3.10.4 Following a route .................................................................................................. 3-45
3.10.5 Cancelling route navigation.................................................................................. 3-48
3.11 Alarms .............................................................................................................................. 3-49
3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off ................................................................................................ 3-49
3.11.2 Arrival alarm ......................................................................................................... 3-50
3.11.3 Anchor watch alarm ............................................................................................. 3-51
3.11.4 XTE (Cross-Track Error) alarm ............................................................................ 3-52
3.11.5 Speed alarm ......................................................................................................... 3-52
3.11.6 Proximity alarm..................................................................................................... 3-53
3.11.7 Trip alarm ............................................................................................................. 3-53
3.11.8 Grounding alarm (C-MAP specification)............................................................... 3-54
3.11.9 Alarm information ................................................................................................. 3-55
3.12 Resetting Trip Distance .................................................................................................... 3-57
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION ........................................................................... 4-1

4.1 Sounder Displays ............................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.1 Selecting a sounder display ................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Description of sounder displays ............................................................................. 4-2
4.1.3 Selecting screen split method in combination displays .......................................... 4-6
4.2 Automatic Sounder Operation ............................................................................................ 4-6
4.2.1 How the automatic sounder works ......................................................................... 4-6
4.2.2 Types of automatic sounder modes ....................................................................... 4-6
4.2.3 How to enable automatic sounder operation.......................................................... 4-7
4.3 Manual Sounder Operation ................................................................................................ 4-7
4.3.1 Selecting the manual mode.................................................................................... 4-7
4.3.2 Selecting display range .......................................................................................... 4-7
4.3.3 Adjusting the gain................................................................................................... 4-8
v
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.3.4 Shifting the range ....................................................................................................4-8

4.4 Measuring Depth, Time .......................................................................................................4-9
4.5 Reducing Interference .........................................................................................................4-9
4.6 Reducing Low Level Noise................................................................................................4-10
4.7 Erasing Weak Echoes .......................................................................................................4-11
4.8 White Marker .....................................................................................................................4-12
4.9 Picture Advance Speed .....................................................................................................4-12
4.9.1 Advancement independent of ship’s speed ..........................................................4-12
4.9.2 Advancement synchronized with ship’s speed......................................................4-13
4.10 Display Colors ...................................................................................................................4-14
4.11 Alarms ...............................................................................................................................4-15
4.11.1 Audio alarm on/off .................................................................................................4-15
4.11.2 Bottom alarm.........................................................................................................4-16
4.11.3 Fish alarm .............................................................................................................4-16
4.11.4 Fish alarm (B/L).....................................................................................................4-17
4.11.5 Water temperature alarm ......................................................................................4-17
4.11.6 When an alarm setting is violated... ......................................................................4-18
4.12 Water Temperature Graph.................................................................................................4-19
4.13 Changing Pulse Repetition Rate .......................................................................................4-19
4.14 Saving Sounder Picture to an SD Card.............................................................................4-20
4.15 Interpreting the Sounder Display.......................................................................................4-20
4.15.1 Zero line ................................................................................................................4-20
4.15.2 Bottom echo ..........................................................................................................4-21
4.15.3 Fish school echoes ...............................................................................................4-22
4.15.4 Surface noise/Aeration..........................................................................................4-22
5. AIS OPERATION ...................................................................................................5-1

5.1 Turning AIS Feature On/Off.................................................................................................5-1
5.2 AIS Symbols........................................................................................................................5-3
5.3 Setting Number of AIS Targets to Display ...........................................................................5-3
5.4 Activating Targets ................................................................................................................5-4
5.5 Displaying Target Data ........................................................................................................5-4
5.6 Lost Target...........................................................................................................................5-5
5.7 Setting CPA and TCPA ........................................................................................................5-5
5.8 Proximity Alarm ...................................................................................................................5-6
5.9 Showing, Hiding AIS Target Tracks .....................................................................................5-7
5.10 Choosing Vector Time .........................................................................................................5-7
5.11 Displaying Past Positions of AIS Targets.............................................................................5-8
6. DATA TRANSFER..................................................................................................6-1
6.1 Memory Card Operations ....................................................................................................6-1
6.1.1 Deleting all data from memory cards (other than chart data)..................................6-1
6.1.2 Saving data to a memory card ................................................................................6-2
6.1.3 Playing back data from a memory card...................................................................6-3
6.2 Uploading, Downloading Data.............................................................................................6-4
6.2.1 Setting communication software on the PC ............................................................6-4
6.2.2 Uploading or downloading data...............................................................................6-4
6.3 Loading Waypoint Data from Yeoman.................................................................................6-7
6.4 Receiving Data Via Network Equipment .............................................................................6-8
6.5 Outputting Data Through the Network.................................................................................6-9
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT..................................................................................7-1

7.1 General Setup .....................................................................................................................7-1
7.2 Radar Setup ........................................................................................................................7-4
7.2.1 Radar display setup ................................................................................................7-4
7.2.2 Radar range setup ..................................................................................................7-7
vi vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
7.2.3 Function key setup ................................................................................................. 7-8

7.3 Plotter Setup..................................................................................................................... 7-10
7.3.1 Navigation options................................................................................................ 7-10
7.3.2 Function key setup ................................................................................................7-11
7.4 Chart Setup ...................................................................................................................... 7-14
7.4.1 Chart offset........................................................................................................... 7-14
7.4.2 Navionics GOLD chart attributes.......................................................................... 7-15
7.4.3 C-MAP chart attributes ......................................................................................... 7-16
7.5 Data Boxes Setup ............................................................................................................ 7-22
7.6 Hot Page Setup ................................................................................................................ 7-23
7.7 Navigator Setup................................................................................................................ 7-24
7.7.1 Navigation data source......................................................................................... 7-24
7.7.2 FURUNO BB GPS receiver setup........................................................................ 7-26
7.7.3 TD display setup .................................................................................................. 7-29
7.8 Nav Data Display Setup ................................................................................................... 7-32
7.9 Sounder Setup ................................................................................................................. 7-33
7.9.1 System setup........................................................................................................ 7-33
7.9.2 Sensor setup ........................................................................................................ 7-36
7.9.3 Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range ................................................ 7-37
7.9.4 Function key setup ............................................................................................... 7-38
7.10 Nav Graphic Display Setup .............................................................................................. 7-40
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................. 8-1

8.1 Preventive Maintenance..................................................................................................... 8-1
8.2 Replacement of Batteries ................................................................................................... 8-2
8.3 Replacement of Fuse ......................................................................................................... 8-2
8.4 Replacing the Magnetron ................................................................................................... 8-3
8.5 Simple Troubleshooting...................................................................................................... 8-3
8.5.1 General................................................................................................................... 8-3
8.5.2 Radar...................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.5.3 Plotter ..................................................................................................................... 8-4
8.5.4 Sounder.................................................................................................................. 8-5
8.6 Diagnostics ......................................................................................................................... 8-6
8.6.1 Memory I/O test...................................................................................................... 8-6
8.6.2 Test pattern............................................................................................................. 8-8
8.6.3 Keyboard, remote controller test .......................................................................... 8-10
8.7 GPS Status Display ...........................................................................................................8-11
8.8 Clearing Memories ........................................................................................................... 8-12
8.9 Error Messages ................................................................................................................ 8-13
APPENDIX................................................................................................................. AP-1
Menu Overview .........................................................................................................................AP-1
Geodetic Chart List .................................................................................................................AP-10
Icons ........................................................................................................................................AP-11
SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... SP-1
INDEX ......................................................................................................................... IN-1
Declaration of conformity
vii
FOREWORD
A Word to the Owner of the Model 1724C/1734C Series
Marine Radar, GD-1720C Color Video Plotter
FURUNO Electric Company thanks you for purchasing the Model 1724C/1734C Series
Marine Radar, GD-1720C Color Video Plotter. We are confident you will discover why the
FURUNO name has become synonymous with quality and reliability.
For over 60 years FURUNO Electric Company has enjoyed an enviable reputation for
quality and reliability throughout the world. This dedication to excellence is furthered by our
extensive global network of agents and dealers.
Your equipment is designed and constructed to meet the rigorous demands of the marine
environment. However, no machine can perform its intended function unless properly
installed and maintained. Please carefully read and follow the operation and maintenance
procedures set forth in this manual.
We would appreciate feedback from you, the end-user, about whether we are achieving our
purposes.
Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO.
Features
The 1724C/1734C Radar Series and the GD-1720C Video Plotter work within our network
system called the “NavNet.” Each product has an IP address to communicate with NavNet
compatible products within the network, using TCP/IP protocol through an Ethernet
10BASE-T network.
The main features are as follows:

• Bright 7” screen visible even under direct sunlight.
• User friendly operation with combination of discrete keys, soft keys, and cursor pad.
• Accepts the following SD chart cards: NAVIONICS GOLD or C-MAP NT+/NT MAX charts,
depending on specification. All names mentioned above are registered trademarks of their
respective companies.
• Fast chart redraw.
• Built-in NavNet interface circuit board.
• Highly accurate, WAAS-capable 12-channel FURUNO BB GPS Receiver GP-320B/330B
and Weather Station WS-200 optionally available. (Hereafer these models are collectively
referred to as FURUNO BB GPS receiver.)
• User programmable function keys.
• Video sounder picture available with connection of the optional Network Sounder.
• ARP function (when connecting with MODEL 1824C series)
viii
SYSTEM CONFIGURATIONS
All NavNet products incorporate a “network circuit board” to integrate each NavNet product
on board through an optional LAN cable (Ethernet 10BASE-T). Each NavNet product is
assigned an IP address to enable transfer of images between other NavNet products. For
example, video plotter pictures can be transferred to a radar and vice versa. Pictures
received via the NavNet may be adjusted at the receiving end.
The number of display units which may be installed depends on the number of network
sounder connected. For a system incorporating three or more products, a “hub” is required
to process data.
For one network sounder: one radar and three plotters, or four plotters
For two network sounder: one radar and two plotters, or four plotters
NavNet system (Model 1724C/1734C)
GPS Receiver
Antenna Unit GP-320B/330B or Weather
(ex. MODEL 1724C) Station WS-200
Echo sounder
Navigator
Display Unit
RDP-148
External buzzer
AIS Interface PC
AIS transponder
IF-1500AIS* Echo sounder
* Not required
for AIS Transponder Heading
FA-150.
sensor
Remote
Controller
FA-30
RMC-100 HUB AIS RECEIVER
Rectifier
Network sounder
PR-62
Other NavNet unit ETR-6/10N
(GD-1720C, etc.) ETR-30N
12-24 VDC
100/110/115/220/230 VAC
1φ, 50/60 Hz
NavNet system (Model 1724C/1734C)
ix
Single-unit NavNet system (GD-1720C)
GPS Receiver
GP-320B/330B or Weather
Station WS-200
External buzzer
Display Unit
RDP-148
AIS transponder
AIS Interface
IF-1500AIS*
* Not required
for AIS Transponder
FA-150. Echo sounder
Heading sensor
Remote HUB
Controller
RMC-100
Other NavNet unit FA-30 Rectifier
(MODEL 1724C etc.) AIS RECEIVER PR-62
Network sounder 100/110/115/220/230 VAC

ETR-6/10N 12-24 VDC 1φ, 50/60 Hz
Single-unit NavNet system (GD-1720C)
x
Two-unit NavNet system
GPS Receiver
Antenna Unit GP-320B/330B or Weather
Station WS-200
Radar data
Plotter data
Two-unit NavNet system
xi
Three-or-more-unit NavNet system (Max. 4 display units)
GPS Receiver
GP-320B/330B or Weather
Antenna Unit
Station WS-200
Radar data Plotter data
HUB
Sounder data
Note: The picture disappears

10 seconds after the NavNet
Network sounder cable is disconnected from a
ETR-6/10N "sub" NavNet display unit.
Three-or-more-unit NavNet system
COMPLIANCE WITH R&TTE DIRECTIVE

1999/5/EC This radar complies with the R&TTE Directive 1999/5/EC. In accordance with
Article 6-3 of this directive, FURUNO intends to put this radar on the market of the
following countries in EU as well other markets.
Austria, Belgium, Cyprus, Denmark, Estonia, Finland, France, Germany, Greece, Hungary,
Ireland, Italy, Latvia, Lithuania, Malta, Poland, Portugal, Slovenia, Spain, Sweden, The
Netherlands, United Kingdom, Iceland, Norway.
xii
1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW
This chapter provides the basic information needed to get you started using your radar,
video plotter.
1.1 Operating Controls

1.1.1 Display unit controls
Display unit controls
The radar, video plotter, sounder and chart systems are operated with the controls of the
display unit (and the remote controller). Ten keys are labeled and they provide the function
shown on their labels. The five soft keys provide various functions according to current
operating mode. The ENTER knob mainly functions to register selections on the menu and
adjust the EBL, VRM and gain. The Cursor pad’s main function is to move the cursor
across the screen. When you correctly execute an operation, the unit generates a beep.
Invalid operation causes the unit to emit three beeps.
Selects display mode. Cursor pad

Selects menu items and options;
shifts cursor. Press, release and
press again to change setting
consecutively.
Momentary press: Opens/closes the alarm menu.
Registers own ship’s Clears data; erases selected mark.
position as a waypoint. Opens/closes the main menu.
Press three seconds:
Marks man overboard Selects a range.
position. ENTER knob
Push: Registers options on menus.
Soft keys Rotate: Selects character; adjusts sensitivity
(sounder, radar); chooses menu items and options.
Displays the soft keys for EBL/VRM.
Radar: Displays the soft keys for adjustment of
gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and FTC.
Sounder: Adjusts gain.
Long press: Turns power on/off.
Shows or hides the soft Momentary press: Opens the
keys, function keys, display for adjustment of brilliance,
nav data alternately. etc. For radar, switches STBY and TX.
Chart slot
1-1
Soft keys
The function of the five soft keys changes according to the operation. Their labels for their
current functions are shown on the screen to the left of the keys. To hide or show the soft
keys, press the HIDE/SHOW key. Each press of the key shows preset soft keys, user
function keys or turns off navigation information (at the top of the screen).
SOFT
KEYS
Display unit
Some soft keys show the current setting of a soft key in reverse video as shown below.
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M TRIP NU
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
16.0nm MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS Current option
shown in reverse video
D.BOX
ON/OFF
WPT 002 FISH
BRIDGE
Plotter displays
1-2
1.1.2 Remote controller
Operating distance
90°: Up to 5 m
SAVE ±45°: Up to 3 m
RANGE DISP MOB Replace the batteries (AA) when the

distance from which the display
unit can be operated shortens.
ABC 1 DEF 2 GHI 3
Note: The remote controller may

JKL 4 MNO 5 PQR 6
become damaged if dropped.
Mishandling of the remote
STU 7 VWX 8 YZ& 9 controller is not covered by
the warranty.
EBL/VRM ’# 0 GAIN
WPT CENTER
MARK CNTL
ENT
ENT
CLEAR MENU
BRILL TONE TX/STBY ACQ
ALARM HIDE/SHOW
SK1 SK2 SK3 SK4 SK5
Remote controller
.
Key Function Key Function
RANGE Same as RANGE key on ENT Same as ENTER knob on
display unit. display unit.
DISP Same as DISP key on CLEAR Same as CLEAR key on
SAVE MOB Same as SAVE/MOB key on MENU Same as MENU key on
Ten keys Enter alphanumerics. BRILL Adjusts display brilliance.
EBL/VRM Same as EBL/VRM key on TONE Not used.
display unit.
GAIN Same as GAIN key on TX/STBY Toggles radar between
display unit. standby and transmit.
WPT Displays “alphabet” WPT list ACQ Acquires radar target.
on plotter display. (Requires radar source
equipped with ARP.)
MARK ENT Same as MARK ENTRY soft ALARM Same as ALARM key on the
key. display unit.
CENTER Returns own ship to screen HIDE/SHOW Same as HIDE/SHOW key
center on plotter display. on display unit.
CNTL Switches control between SK1 – SK5 Same as soft keys on display
displays on combination (soft keys) unit.
displays.
1-3
1.2 Inserting a Chart Card

Your unit reads SD cards, in the following formats: Navionics GOLD Chart cards or C-MAP
NT+/NT MAX chart cards, depending on the type of display unit you have. Insert the
appropriate chart card for your area as follows:
1. Open the chart drive.
Chart slot
Display unit
2. Insert chart card label side up.
3. Close the lid.
To remove chart card, follow the steps shown below.

1. Press the MENU key to show the menu.
2. Press the SHOW/HIDE soft key.
3. Open the chart drive lid, and then push the card once and then pull it out.
Note 1: Do not remove a card while the chart is being drawn. This may cause the
equipment to freeze.
Note 2: Do not insert or remove a card while the power is on. This may cause the
equipment to freeze.
Note 3: For multiple display units, do not use the same chart card type in more than one
display unit.
Note 4: Remove the card with care; rough handling can damage the card and destroy its
contents.
1-4
1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off

Press the POWER/BRILL key to turn the unit on. A beep sounds and then the equipment
shows the startup NavNet screen (about 20 seconds), the product information screen,
startup test results and chart usage disclaimer. During this period the equipment is
inoperative. The startup test checks the ROM, RAM, internal battery and backup data for
proper operation, displaying the results for each as OK or NG (No Good). If NG appears an
appropriate message appears on the screen. For any NG, try to press any key to go to the
chart disclaimer screen, then perform the diagnostic test as shown in the paragraph “8.6
Diagnostics.”
For start up with the radar display, the magnetron takes from 60 seconds to 90seconds
(depending on radar model) to warm up before the radar can be operated. The time
remaining for warming up of the magnetron is counted down at the center of the display.
You may press any key at the chart disclaimer screen to show the last-used display, or wait
several seconds to let the equipment do it for you.
To turn the unit off, press and hold down the POWER/BRILL key until the screen goes dark
(approx. 3 sec.). To protect the LCD attach the hard cover. Note that the network sounder
will be turned off approx. three minutes after turning off the power. This is due to the
system’s electrical characteristics.
Note: The first time you turn on the power (or any time the power is applied after a memory
reset), you are asked if you want to start the simulation mode, which provides simulated
operation of the equipment after the installation mode selection. Push the ENTER knob to
start the simulation mode, or press the CLEAR key to start normal operation. For further
details about the simulation mode, see the paragraph “1.10 Simulation Display.”
1-5
1.4 Display Brilliance, Panel Brilliance, Hue

You can adjust display brilliance, panel brilliance and hue as shown below.
1.4.1 Display brilliance, panel brilliance

1. Press the POWER/BRILL key momentarily. A set of soft keys for adjustment of
brilliance and hue appear.
Current selection is higtlighted.
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M BRILL

CONTST
H-UP
DISPLY
BRILL
PANEL
BRILL
HUE
RADAR
STBY
RETURN
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE
8
Brilliance adjustment soft keys

2. Press the DISPLY BRILL or PANEL BRILL soft key as appropriate. An adjustment
window appears at the bottom of the screen. This window shows the name of the item
selected for adjustment plus current brilliance level, by bar graph.
DISPLAY BRILLIANCE PANEL BRILLIANCE

8 8
Display brilliance Panel brilliance
Display brilliance and panel brilliance windows

3. Adjust the ENTER knob, clockwise to raise the setting or counterclockwise to decrease
it. You may also use the soft key pressed at step 2. Eight levels of display brilliance and
panel brilliance are available.
4. Hit the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note 1: If the unit is turned off with minimum brilliance, the screen will be dark at the next
power-up. Press the POWER/BRILL key consecutively to adjust the brilliance.
Note 2: This equipment does not have a contrast control.
1-6
1.4.2 Hue
You may select the colors for the radar, plotter and overlay displays as below.
1. Press the POWER/BRILL key momentarily.

2. Press the HUE soft key to show the hue setting window.
HUE
▲
¡ DAY
¡ NIGHT
¡ TWILIGHT
¤ MANUAL SET
▼
Hue window
3. Operate the Cursor pad to select hue desired, referring to the table below. MANUAL
SET follows the color settings on the CHART DETAILS menu for the plotter and the
RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu for the radar.
Night Day Twilight

Characters Red Black Green
Radar ring Red Green Green
Radar echo Orange Multi Orange
Background Black White Blue**
Landmass (plotter) Orange* Light-orange Orange
* = Beige and light-beige on C-MAP display unit.
**= Black for Overlay screen
4. Hit the RETURN soft key to finish.
Note: When using the overlay screen, the own ship track will be hidden if the radar
background and own ship track are blue and the “MANUAL SET” hue setting is used. In this
case, set HUE to other position and then return to “MANUAL” to show the own ship track in
black.
1-7
1.5 Selecting a Display

1.5.1 Display modes
If you have a radar, navigator and network sounder five full-screen displays are available:
radar, plotter, echo sounder, nav data and overlay. In addition to the full-screen display, you
can divide the screen into halves and thirds to show two and three sets of images on a
combination display.
Full screen Combination screen Overlay screen

(Ex. radar) (Ex. radar + sounder) (Radar and plotter,
color model only.
Requires L/L data)
Display screens
The table below shows the displays available with each screen type.
Screen type and available display screen
Full screen Combination screen options Overlay screen
(half- or thirds-screen) options
Plotter, radar, sounder, Plotter, radar, sounder, Radar + plotter

nav data, overlay compass (or wind), highway,
compass (or wind)/highway,
nav data, overlay
1-8
1.5.2 Selecting a display

1. Press the DISP key to show the display screen selection window. The icons of modes
not available are shaded. HOTPAGE 1-HOTPAGE 5 are user-arrangeable displays
called “hot pages,” which you can configure as you like. For further details, see the
paragraph “7.6 Hot Page Setup.”
Basic display
screens
RADAR PLOTTER SOUNDER NAV DATA OVRLAY
Hot pages
HOTPAGE1 HOTPAGE2 HOTPAGE3HOTPAGE4 HOTPAGE5
· TURN KNOB TO SELECT MODE

AND PUSH KNOB TO ENTER.
· PUSH ANY SOFT KEY TO
SELECT IMAGE SOURCE.
Display screen selection window

2. Rotate the ENTER knob to select a basic display screen or a hot page screen.
3. Push the ENTER knob.
4. If you select a basic display screen, a group of appropriate combination displays appear.
In the example below, the radar combination screens are shown.
PUSH ENTER KNOB.
Radar combination screen selection window

5. Rotate the ENTER knob to select display desired.
6. Push the ENTER knob to finish.
1-9
1.5.3 Switching control in combination and overlay screens

A soft key is provided in relevant combination and overlay screens to switch control
between displays. In the example below, the CNTRL PLOTTR and CNTRL RADAR soft
keys enable switching control between the plotter and sounder screens in the
plotter/sounder combination display.
12 LP3nm 12 LP3nm
H-UP H-UP
SIGNAL CNTL
CNTRL
MARK
PROC. RADAR
RADAR
ENTRY
ST-BY RADAR To adjust ST-BY

MODE
DISPLY plotter NTH UP
359.9
NAV ° R 359.9
NAV ° R
+ FUNC + POS
11.7nm 11.7nm
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M TRIP NU 34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M TRIP NU
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
TARGET 080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
16.0nm CNTRL 16.0nm
PLOTTR
CNTRL CNTRL
RADAR PLOTTR
To adjust
radar
WP-002 FISH WP-002 FISH
Radar display selected Plotter display selected
How to switch control between modes in the plotter/sounder combination display
1-10
1.5.4 Selecting image source

When more than one network radar or network sounder is connected to the equipment, you
may select an image source for each as shown below. This is not necessary when only one
network radar or network sounder is connected.
1. Press the DISP key.

2. Press any soft key to show the following display.
SELECT
RADAR SOURCE SOURCE
▲
1 (HOST NAME: NAVNET1)
SOUNDER SOURCE* EDIT
SOUNDER _
IP ADDRESS
172.031.003.003
DEVICE NUMBER
2 (HOST NAME: NAVNET2)
IF THERE IS MORE THAN

ONE NETWORK RADAR OR
RETURN
ECHO SOUNDER, YOU MAY
SELECT THE IMAGE
SOURCES FOR DISPLAY.
*: Do not change this setting.
Select source menu

3. Use the Cursor pad to select RADAR SOURCE, SOUNDER SOURCE or AUX
SOURCE as appropriate, then press the EDIT key.
RADAR SOURCE SOUNDER SOURCE

▲ ▲
¤ 1 (NAVNET1) ¤ ETR0 (SOUNDER)
¡ 2 (NAVNET2) ¡ ETR1 (SOUNDER1)
▼ ¡ ETR4 (SOUNDER4)
¡ ETR5 (SOUNDER5)
Radar source ¡ ETR6 (SOUNDER6)
¡ ETR7 (SOUNDER7)
¡ ETR8 (SOUNDER8)
¡ ETR9 (SOUNDER9)
▼
Sounder source
Radar source and sounder source windows

4. Use the Cursor pad to choose source.
5. Push the ENTER knob to set.
6. Press the DISP key to finish.
7. Turn the power off and on again.
1-11
1.6 Cursor pad, Cursor

The Cursor pad functions to shift the cursor, for measurement of range and bearing to a
location (radar) and latitude and longitude position (plotter). Roll the Cursor pad to shift the
cursor. The cursor moves in the direction of Cursor pad rotation.
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M Cursor data + 34° 22. 3456'N

080° 22. 3456'E
272.4°M
15.9 nm
TRIP NU
99.9 nm
H-UP L/L position,
SIGNAL Range and 16.0nm MARK
PROC
Cursor bearing from ENTRY
own ship to
RADAR MODE
DISPLY cursor NTH UP
NAV
FUNC CENTER
Cursor
TARGET GOTO
CURSOR
ZOOM & D. BOX

D. BOX ON/ OFF
359.9°R
+
0.24nm
Radar display Plotter display
Cursor, cursor data
1-12
1.7 Entering the MOB Mark, Setting MOB as

Destination
The MOB mark functions to mark man
overboard position. You can inscribe the
mark from any mode except nav data, MOB
mark
when playing back data or conducting M
any test. Note that this function requires (MOB)
position data. Range, bearing
M 162.5°M
Man Current O
Note: The function of the SAVE/MOB B 0.49 nm
overboard position
key depends on the setting of SAVE
MOB KEY FUNCTION in the GENERAL MOB Data Box
SETUP menu. The description below Bearing and range
to MOB position
shows the procedure using the default
setting. For further details, see Save MOB concept
MOB Key Function on page 7-2.
1. Press and hold down the SAVE/MOB key for about three seconds when someone falls
overboard. The display shows the waypoint number being saved (youngest empty
waypoint number, 001-999) followed by the MOB confirmation window.
Time remaining is counted down while pressing the SAVE/MOB key.
WAYPOINT SAVED! CONTINUE PUSHING MAN OVER BOARD!
FOR MOB! GO TO MOB?
XXXWPT YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
CONTINUE PUSHING XX SEC NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
FOR MOB!
XXX = Waypoint number XX = Time remaining is counted down.
MOB mark messages

2. Push the ENTER knob to select the MOB position as the destination, or press the
CLEAR key to only mark current ship’s position as a waypoint. If you select the MOB
position as destination;
• A full-screen radar, plotter or overlay appears depending on the display in use. (If the
MOB key function is “MOB Without Confirmation” the range is automatically set to
0.5 nm.) Further, the waypoint marker appears on the radar display.
• The MOB mark “MOB” appears at the MOB position and a light-blue line runs
between it and current position. This line shows the shortest course to the MOB
position.
• Range and bearing to the MOB position are shown in the MOB data box.
To erase an MOB mark from the plotter display, you must first erase its corresponding
waypoint. Place the cursor on the MOB mark, then press the CLEAR key followed by
pushing the ENTER knob to erase the waypoint. Then, repeat to erase the MOB mark.
1-13
1.8 Data Boxes

Data boxes, providing navigation data, may be shown on any full-screen display. Up to six
data boxes (two in case of large characters) may be shown, and the default data boxes are
position (in latitude and longitude), course over ground, speed over ground and trip log. The
user may choose which data to display, where to locate it, and show or hide it as desired. In
addition, data boxes may be set independently for each display mode (plotter, radar,
sounder). For how to select data for the data boxes, see the paragraph “7.5 Data Boxes
Setup.”
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M
H-UP
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
NAV
POS
TRIP LOG D.BOX

177nm ON /OFF
POSITION
47° COG SOG
58.535'N
122°
36.496'W
323.6°M 20.0 kt
350.4°M
0.000 nm
Data boxes
Data boxes
1.8.1 Showing, hiding data boxes with soft key

Plotter: D. BOX ON/OFF
Radar: ZOOM & D. BOX → D. BOX ON/OFF (EBL/VRM data box, cursor data
box also shown/hidden)
Sounder: AUTO/D. BOX→D. BOX ON/OFF
1.8.2 Rearranging data boxes

You may select the location for data boxes as follows:
1. Using the Cursor pad, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move. As the
cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand”. Push the ENTER knob, and the hand
changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.
2. Use the Cursor pad to move the data box to the location desired, then push the ENTER
knob.
1.8.3 Temporarily erasing a data box

If a data box is obscuring a desired object, you may temporarily erase the box. Use the
Cursor pad to place the cursor inside the data box you wish to erase, then press the
CLEAR key. To redisplay the box, press the D. BOX soft key twice to display it.
1-14
1.9 Function Keys

The function keys provide for one-touch execution of a desired function. The default
function key settings are as shown in the table below.
Function Default Setting, Key Label

Key Radar Plotter Sounder
#1 Heading line on/off, HL Track on/off, TRK TLL output, TLL
#2 Rings on/off, RNG Edit mark/line, EML Clutter, CLT
#3 Echo trail, TRL Ruler, RUL Signal level, SLV
#4 Offcenter, OFC Add new waypoint, Noise limiter, NL
ADD
#5 STBY/TX, TX Waypoint Picture advance, PA
alphanumeric list, ALP
1. Press the HIDE/SHOW key to replace the preset soft key labels with the function key
labels.
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M TARGET

34° 22. 3456'N
080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M
19.9 kt
TRIP NU
99.9 nm
H-UP 16.0nm
H T
L R
K
R E
N M
G L
T R
R
L
Function U Function
L
keys keys
S A
F D
T 002WP D
FISH
BRIDGE
D A
B L
X p
359.9°R
+
0.24nm
Radar Plotter
Function keys
2. Press function key desired.
Note: Function keys can be individually programmed for the plotter, radar and sounder
displays. For further details see the following:
Radar: paragraph 7.2.3

Plotter: paragraph 7.3.2
Sounder: paragraph 7.9.4
1-15
1.10 Simulation Display

The simulation display, for use by service technicians for demonstration purposes, provides
simulated operation to help acquaint you with the many features your unit has to offer. It
allows you to view and control a simulated plotter, radar and sounder picture, without
position-fixing equipment, network radar or a network sounder. Most controls are operative,
thus you may practice setting destination, enter waypoints, measure range and bearing to a
target, etc. Three simulation displays are provided for both the radar and echo sounder.
The simulation icon (SIM) appears when any simulation mode is active.
To start the simulation display;
1. Press the MENU key.

2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP and SIMULATION SETUP
soft keys in that order.
SIM
RADAR SETUP
LIVE
PLOTTER EDIT
LIVE
SOUNDER
LIVE
SPEED
00.0kt
COURSE
000.0°
LATITUDE
45°35.000’N
LONGITUDE
123°00.000’W
START DATE & TIME RETURN
00:00 01.APR.01
GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA
NO
Simulation setup menu

3. Follow appropriate procedure on the next several pages. To stop the simulation mode
and return to normal operation, choose LIVE for radar, sounder or plotter.
Radar
NavNet display unit-generated echoes or user data
1. Select RADAR, then press the EDIT soft key.
RADAR
▲
¡ BUILT IN DATA 1
¡ BUILT IN DATA 2
¡ USER DATA
¤ LIVE
▼
2. Select BUILT IN DATA 1 or 2 for internally generated echoes or USER DATA for
user-saved radar data. Push the ENTER knob.
3. Press the MENU key to close the menu.
1-16
NavNet radar antenna-generated echoes (not available with the GD-1720C)

1. Select GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA, then press the EDIT soft key.
2. Select YES, then push the ENTER knob to erase simulation data and get new data. The
message “NOW GETTING SIMULATION DATA. Do not turn off display unit.” appears
while the unit is receiving radar data.
Note: If the network radar could not be found “Radar source is not found. Cannot get
demo data.” appears. And if the radar is not active, the message “Radar is not active.
Cannot get demo data.” is displayed. Check that the radar is plugged in and its signal
cable is firmly fastened.
3. Select RADAR, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Select BUILT IN DATA 2, then push the ENTER knob.
Plotter
1. Select PLOTTER, then press the EDIT soft key.
2. Select SIMULATION, then push the ENTER knob. PLOTTER
3. Select SPEED, then press the EDIT soft key. ▲
4. Enter speed (setting range, 0-99 kt, default speed, 0 kt) with { SIMULATION
~ LIVE
the alphanumeric keys, then push the ENTER knob. ▼
5. Select COURSE, then press the EDIT soft key.
6. Select “8 FIGURE” to trace the simulated ship’s track in a
figure-eight course, or enter your own course at DIRECTION. To enter course, use the
Cursor pad to select digit, and enter value with the alphanumeric keys.
7. Press the ENTER soft key.
8. Select LATITUDE, then press the EDIT soft key.
9. Enter latitude (setting range, 85°N-85°S, default setting, 45°35.000’N), then push the
ENTER knob.
10. Select LONGITUDE, then press the EDIT soft key.
11. Enter longitude (setting range, 180°E-180°W, default setting, 125°00.000’W), then push
the ENTER knob.
12. Select START DATE & TIME, then press the EDIT soft key.
13. Enter start date and time, then push the ENTER knob.
Sounder
1. Select SOUNDER, then press the EDIT soft key.
2. Select BUILT IN DATA (internally generated echoes) or SOUNDER
ETR (network sounder-generated echoes), then push the ▲
ENTER knob. { BUILT IN DATA
{ ETR
Note: The depth, shift, bottom-zoom, bottom-lock and ~ LIVE
bottom discrimination cannot be shown in the BUILT IN ▼
DATA mode.
1-17
This page intentionally left blank.
1-18
2. RADAR OPERATION
This chapter covers radar operation, including the ARP (Auto Plotter) function. ARP
requires a Model 18x4C/19x4C series network radar equipped with the ARP circuit board as
radar source.
2.1 Radar Display

Heading Heading line
Cursor M: Magnetic
T: True North marker
Pulselength
Range/
..250 /SP.125nm 319.9°M

range ring TRAIL 30m Trail time
interval 02m30s Trail elapsed time
Presentation G1 IN Guard zone 1
mode
H-UP Guard zone 2
G2 OUT
Alarm icon ES L Echo stretch
Battery icon IR L Interference rejector

Guard zone 2
Zoom area VRM2

EBL1
VRM1
Guard zone 1
EBL2
Range ring
Own ship vector*

(ARP-equipped model,
true vector mode)
Zoom * = Radar source

window Model 1834/1834C
series radar
EBL1 range EBL1 EBL2 359.9°R

27.0°R 327.1°R Cursor range
VRM1 VRM2
VRM1 range 0 .158nm 0 .225nm 0.18nm and bearing
(Cursor position may
also be shown, in
EBL2 bearing, VRM2 range L/L or Loran C TD.)
Radar display
2-1
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.2 Transmitting, Stand-by

1. Confirm that the network radar is plugged in.
2. Press the DISP key to select a radar display.
3. Press the POWER/BRILL key momentarily.
4. Press the RADAR STBY soft key to highlight TX on its label.
5. Press the RETURN soft key.
When the radar picture is not required, but you want keep it in a state of readiness, press
the RADAR TX soft key to highlight STBY on its label.
2.3 Tuning
The radar receiver can be tuned automatically or manually, and the default tuning method is
automatic. If you require manual tuning, do the following:
1. Press the MENU key to display the main menu.

2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key.
3. Select TUNING, then press the EDIT soft key.
TUNING
¤ AUTO
¡ MAN Tuning bar
Tuning window
4. Choose MAN.
5. Adjust the ENTER knob until the tuning bar is at its longest position.
Note: If the auto setting does not provide satisfactory tuning, ask your dealer how to
re-adjust tuning.
2.4 Adjusting the Gain

The GAIN key adjusts the gain sensitivity of the radar receiver. It works in a manner similar
to that of volume control of a broadcast receiver, which amplifies received signals.
The proper setting is such that the background noise is just visible on the screen. If your
gain setting is too low, weak echoes may be missed. On the other hand, excessive gain
yields too much background noise; strong targets may be missed because of the poor
contrast between desired echoes and the background noise on the display.
To adjust the receiver sensitivity, transmit on long range, and then do the following:
2-2
1. Press the GAIN key to show the “gain adjustment”
soft keys, and the last-used adjustment window GAIN SENSITIVITY
appears. The example below shows the gain ¤ AUTO ROUGH
sensitivity adjustment window. The gain soft keys ¡ AUTO MODERATE
shown depend on radar source as shown below. ¡ AUTO CALM
¡ MAN 0
2. If the gain sensitivity window is not displayed, press
the GAIN soft key to show the gain sensitivity setting
window. Gain sensitivity window
3. Use the Cursor pad to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO
MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or MAN (manual) as
appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea state.
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the ENTER knob to adjust, while observing the radar
echo. The range of adjustment is 0-100.
5. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or the RETURN soft key to finish.
Adjusting the FTC

To suppress rain clutter from heavy storms or scattered rain clutter, adjust the FTC.
In addition to reducing clutter, the FTC can be used in fine weather to clarify the picture
when navigating in confined waters. However, with the circuit active the receiver is less
sensitive.
1. Press the GAIN key.

2. Press the FTC soft key, and then rotate the ENTER knob toadjust.
3. Press the GAIN key on the front panel or RETURN soft key to finish.
2.5 Reducing Sea Clutter

2.5.1 How the A/C SEA works
Echoes from waves can be troublesome, covering the central part of the display with
random signals known as “sea clutter”. The higher the waves and the higher the antenna
above the water, the further the clutter will extend. Sea clutter may affect radar performance
because real targets are sometimes hidden by the echoes of small waves. (See the
left-hand figure in the figure below.) When sea clutter masks the picture, adjust the A/C
SEA to reduce the clutter.
The A/C SEA reduces the amplification of echoes at short ranges (where clutter is the
greatest) and progressively increases amplification as the range increases, so amplification
will be normal at those ranges where there is no sea clutter.
Sea clutter at A/C SEA adjusted;

screen center sea clutter suppressed
Effect of A/C SEA
2-3
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.5.2 Adjusting the A/C SEA

A/C SEA should be adjusted so that the clutter is broken up into small dots, and small
targets become distinguishable.

2. Press the A/C SEA soft key to show the A/C SEA setting window.
A/C SEA
¡ AUTO ROUGH
¡ AUTO MODERATE
¡ AUTO CALM
¤ MAN 0
A/C SEA setting window

3. Use the Cursor pad to select AUTO ROUGH, AUTO MODERATE, AUTO CALM, or
MAN (manual) as appropriate. Select an AUTO option according to the sea state.
4. For manual adjustment, rotate the ENTER knob to adjust. The range of adjustment is
0-100. Do not overadjust – weak echoes may be missed.
2.6 Reducing Precipitation Clutter

The vertical beamwidth of the antenna is designed to see surface targets even when the
ship is rolling. However, by this design the unit will also detect precipitation clutter (rain,
snow, hail, etc.) in the same manner as normal targets. Precipitation clutter shows as
random dots on the screen.
When echoes from precipitation mask solid targets, adjust the A/C RAIN to split up these
unwanted echoes into a speckled pattern, making recognition of solid targets easier.

2. Press the A/C RAIN soft key to show the A/C RAIN window.
A/C RAIN
0
A/C RAIN setting window

3. Rotate the ENTER knob to adjust the A/C RAIN. The current level is shown on the A/C
RAIN level bar in the A/C RAIN window, and the range of adjustment is 0 to 100(%). Do
not overadjust – weak echoes may be missed.
2-4
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.7 Range Scale

The range setting determines the size of the area (in nautical miles) that will appear on your
display. In addition, the range setting will also automatically adjust the range ring interval so
that accurate range measurements may be made while operating on any range setting.
The range, range ring interval and pulselength appear at the top left-hand corner of the
display.
Press the [RANGE (+ or -)] key to change the range scale.

Range scales (nm, sm)
Range 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48 64 72

Ring
0.0625 0.125 0.125 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 12 16 18
Interval
No. of
2 2 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 5 5 5 4 5 5 5
Rings
Range scales (km)
Range 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36 48 64 72

Ring Interval 0.125 0.25 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12 12 16 18
No. of Rings 2 2 4 5 4 5 4 5 4 5 5 5 5 4 5 5 5
Note 1: Maximum range depends on the network radar as shown below.
Model 1724C, 1734C, 1824C: 24 nm
Model 1834C: 36 nm
Model 1934C: 48 nm
Model 1944C: 64 nm
Model 1954C, 1964C: 72 nm
Note 2: You may choose which ranges to use from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu. For
details see paragraph 7.2.2. This function is not available with the GD-1720C.
2-5
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.8 Pulselength
The pulselength in use is displayed at the upper left corner of the display. Appropriate
pulselengths are preset to individual range scales. Therefore, you are not usually required
to select them. If you are not satisfied with the current pulselength setting, however, it is
possible to change it for the ranges shown below. Generally, select a longer pulse for
longer detection range and shorter pulse for better range discrimination.
1.5 nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km: Short pulse, medium pulse

3 nm, 3 sm, 6 km: Medium pulse, long pulse
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the SIGNAL PROC. soft key.
1.5/ .500nm
SP 319.9°M SIGNAL
PROCESS
H-UP
I. REJ
LOW
PULSE
SHORT
E. STR
LOW
RETURN
359.9°R
+
1.40nm
Signal process soft keys

3. Choose the 1.5 nm or 3 nm with the RANGE key.
4. Press the PULSE soft key to select the pulselength setting. SHORT or MEDIUM for 1.5
nm, 1.5 sm, 3 km and MEDIUM or LONG for 3 nm, 3 sm,
6 km.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
2-6
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.9 Presentation Mode

This unit provides four radar presentation modes: head-up, course-up, north-up and true
motion.
Heading data is required for modes other than head-up.
2.9.1 Selecting a presentation mode

2. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key to show the RADAR DISPLAY soft keys.
3. Press the MODE soft key. Each pressing of the key changes the presentation mode and
the presentation mode indication in the sequence of North-up, True Motion, Head-up,
and Course-up.
Function Indicator on display Soft key label
North-up N-UP NTH UP
True Motion TR-M TRUE M
Head-up H-UP HD UP
Course-up C-UP CSE UP
Note: When heading data is lost, the presentation mode automatically goes to head-up, the
heading indication at the screen top shows “- - -.-°” and the audio alarm sounds. Press the
ALARM key to acknowledge the alarm. The message “HEADING DATA MISSING” appears.
Restore compass signal to show heading indication. Use the CLEAR key presentation
mode if necessary. The audio alarm may be silenced with the CLEAR key.
2-7
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.9.2 Description of presentation modes

Head-up Heading Line
North Marker
A display without azimuth stabilization in which the line

connecting the center with the top of the display
indicates own ship’s heading. Targets are painted at
their measured distances and in their directions
relative to own ship’s heading.
The short line on the bearing scale is the north marker.
Course-up Head-up display
The radar picture is stabilized and displayed with the North Marker Heading Line
currently selected course at the top of the screen. As
you change heading, the ship’s heading line moves. If
you select a new course, the picture resets to display
the new course at the top of the display.
Targets are painted at their measured distances and in

their directions relative to the intended course which is
maintained at the 0-degree position. The heading line
moves in accordance with ship’s yawing and course
changes. Course-up display
North Heading Line

North-up
In the north-up mode, targets are painted at their
measured distances and in their true (compass)
directions from own ship. North is maintained at the
top of the screen. The heading line changes its
direction according to ship’s heading.
True motion
Fixed radar targets maintain a constant position on the
screen, while your own ship moves across the radar North-up display
image at the correct speed and heading. A map-like
image is displayed, with all moving vessels traveling in North Heading Line
true perspective to each other and to fixed landmasses.
As your ship’s position approaches the edge of the
screen, the radar display is automatically reset to
reveal the area ahead of your ship. You can manually
reset your ship’s position at any time by pressing the
RADAR DISPLY soft key followed by the SHIFT soft
key.
True motion display
2-8
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.10 Measuring the Range

You can measure the range to a radar target three ways: by the range rings, by the cursor,
and by the VRM (Variable Range Marker).
2.10.1 Measuring range by range rings

Count the number of rings between the center of the display and the target. Check the
range ring interval and judge the distance of the echo from the inner edge of the nearest
ring.
To turn the range rings on, do the following:
2. Press the RADAR DISPLY soft key.
3. Press the RINGS soft key to turn the rings on and select desired brilliance.
2.10.2 Measuring range by cursor

Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor intersection on the inside edge of the radar
target. The range to the target, as well as the bearing, appears to the right of “+” at the
bottom of the display.
Target
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M
H-UP
Cursor SIGNAL
PROC.
RADAR
DISPLY
NAV
FUNC
TARGET
ZOOM &
D. BOX
+ 4.3°R
0.240nm
Bearing and range from own

ship to cursor position
How to measure range to a target with the cursor
2-9
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.10.3 Measuring range by VRM

1. Press the EBL/VRM key to display the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Press the VRM1 ON (dotted ring VRM) or VRM2 ON (dashed ring VRM) soft key to
select the desired VRM. The selected VRM’s indication, at the bottom of the screen, is
highlighted.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob then place the VRM on the inside edge of a radar target. Read
the VRM indication to find range to the target.
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M EBL

VRM
H-UP
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
VRM1
(Dotted line) OFFSET
EBL2
ON
VRM2
(Dashed line) VRM2
ON
EBL1 EBL2 359.9°R

VRM1 range VRM1
---.-°R
VRM2
---.-°R +
0.119nm 0.242nm 0.240nm
VRM2 range Active marker is highlighted.
How to measure range with the VRM

4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the EBL/VRM key.
2.10.4 Various VRM operations

Erasing a VRM, VRM indication: Press appropriate VRM soft key, then press the CLEAR
key. The VRM is erased and its indication becomes blank.
Erasing EBL/VRM data boxes: Press the EBL or VRM soft key associated with the
EBL/VRM data box you wish to erase. Press the CLEAR key once or twice to erase the
data box.
Hiding EBL/VRM data boxes: Press the ZOOM & D. BOX and D. BOX ON/OFF soft keys
to show or hide the EBL/VRM data boxes.
Moving EBL/VRM data boxes: When an EBL/VRM data box is obscuring a target you
want to see, you can move it to another location as shown below. This cannot be done
when the EBL/VRM soft keys are shown.
1. Press the EBL/VRM key to turn off the EBL/VRM soft keys.
2. Using the Cursor pad, place the cursor inside the data box you wish to move. As the
cursor enters the box it changes to a “hand.” Push the ENTER knob, and the hand
changes to a fist, meaning the box is correctly selected.
3. Use the Cursor pad to move the data box to the location desired, then push the ENTER
knob.
2-10
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.11 Measuring the Bearing

There are two ways to measure the bearing to a target: by the cursor, and by the EBL
(Electronic bearing Line).
2.11.1 Measuring bearing by cursor

Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor at the center of the target. The bearing to the target
appears in the range and bearing box at the bottom right-hand corner on the screen.
2.11.2 Measuring bearing by EBL

1. Press the EBL/VRM key.
2. Press the EBL1 ON (dotted line EBL) or EBL2 ON (dashed line EBL) soft key to select
the desired EBL. The selected EBL’s indication, at the bottom of the screen, is
highlighted.
3. Rotate the ENTER knob to bisect the radar target with the EBL. Read the EBL indication
to find the bearing to the target.
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M EBL

VRM
H-UP
EBL1
EBL1 ON
(Dotted line)
VRM1
ON
OFFSET
EBL2
EBL2 ON
(Dashed line)
VRM2
EBL2 bearing ON
EBL1 bearing EBL1 EBL2 359.9°R

VRM1
330.1°R
VRM2
234.1°R +
R: Relative -.---nm -.---nm 0.24nm
T: True
Active marker is highlighted.
How to measure bearing with the EBL

4. You may hide the EBL/VRM soft keys by pressing the EBL/VRM key.
Note: The bearing to a target may be shown relative to own ship’s heading (Relative) or
True bearing (requires heading data). This may be done with “EBL REFERENCE,” which is
in the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu.
2.11.3 Various EBL operations

Erasing an EBL, EBL indication: Press appropriate EBL soft key, then press the CLEAR
key. The EBL is erased and its indication becomes blank.
Erasing, hiding, moving EBL/VRM data boxes: See paragraph 2.10.4.
2-11
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.12 Erasing the Heading Line, North Marker

The heading line indicates the ship's heading in all presentation modes. It is a line from the
own ship position to the outer edge of the radar display area and appears at zero degrees
on the bearing scale in head-up mode; it changes its orientation in the north-up, course-up
and true motion modes with ship’s movement.
The north marker appears as a short dashed line. In the head-up and course-up modes the
north marker moves around the bearing scale as the ship’s heading moves.
To temporarily erase the heading line and north marker, press the RADAR DISPLY soft key
followed by the HL OFF soft key. Release the key to redisplay the markers. (If the radar soft
keys are not shown, hit the HIDE/SHOW key to display them.)
2.13 Reducing Noise Interference

Noise, appearing on the displays as random “speckles,” can be reduced as follows:
1. Press the MENU key to open the menu.

3. Select NOISE REJECTION, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Select OFF, LOW or HIGH as appropriate.
2-12
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.14 Rejecting Radar Interference

Radar interference may occur when near another shipborne radar that is operating in the
same frequency band as your radar. Its on-screen appearance looks like many bright dots
either scattered at random or in the form of dotted lines extending from the center to the
edge of the display. Interference effects are distinguishable from normal echoes because
they do not appear in the same place on successive rotations of the scanner.
Be sure to turn off the interference rejector when no interference exists – weak targets may
be missed.
Radar interference
1.5/ .500nm
SP 319.9°M SIGNAL
PROCESS
H-UP
I. REJ
LOW
E. AVG
OFF
PULSE
SHORT
E. STR
LOW
RETURN
359.9°R
+
1.40nm
SIGNAL PROCESS soft keys

3. Press the I. REJ soft key successively to choose the interference rejection level desired;
LOW, MED, HIGH or OFF.
The display shows IR L (Low), IR M (Medium) or IR H (High) when the interference rejector
is on.
2-13
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.15 Zoom
The zoom feature allows you to double the size of the area selected with the “zoom
square.” It is available on any range but is inoperative in true motion and when the display
is shifted.
2.15.1 Zooming radar targets

This function is available when TARGET ID NUMBER is ON.
2. Use the Cursor pad to set the cursor where you want to zoom.
3. Press the ZOOM & D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D. BOX soft keys.
4. Press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ON. A hollow square, called the “zoom
area,” appears on the display.
5. To release the cursor, press the CURSOR FLOAT soft key. (The hollow square changes
to a dashed one.) To relocate the zoom circle, select location with the Cursor pad, then
press the CURSOR LOCK key.
6. To quit the zoom function, press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select OFF.
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M ZOOM

D. BOX
H-UP
ZOOM
ON /OFF
Zoom circle
CURSOR
FLOAT
ARPA
TGT ZM Requires optional
ARP Board in
D. BOX 18x4C/19x4C series
ON/OFF network radar.
Not shown when
Zoom window RETURN radar source is
otherwise.
001.0°R
+
0.160nm
Zoom
2.15.2 Zooming ARP, TTM targets

You may zoom in on TTM (Tracked Target Message) and ARP targets. TTM targets can
come from a NavNet connected radar, or from other ARP radar that is outputting the TTM
message. (TTM is a NMEA 0183 data sentence that is an available output from some ARP
capable radar.) Target numbers must be turned on to use this function. This can be done by
enabling the target ID number option in the ARP SETUP menu.
2. Press the ZOOM/D. BOX soft key to show ZOOM & D. BOX soft keys.
3. Press the ZOOM ON/OFF soft key to select ZOOM ON.
4. Press the ARP TGT ZM soft key.
2-14
2. RADAR OPERATION
SELECT TARGET NO.

▲
1
▼
Target no. selection window

5. Use the ENTER knob to select number (1-10), then push the ENTER knob. If the target
number does not exist several beeps sound and the zoom function is cancelled.
To cancel, press the CURSOR LOCK soft key.
Note: The zoom window blends in with the background when the background color for the
radar picture is white. If the window is difficult to see, change the background color.
2.16 Shifting the Picture

Own ship position, or sweep origin, can be displaced manually or automatically to expand
the view field without switching to a larger scale. Zoom is not available when the display is
shifted.
SHIFT
2.16.1 Manual shift
The sweep origin can be shifted in
any presentation mode to a point
specified by the cursor by up to 50%
of the range in use in any direction.
Cursor
1. Locate the cursor anywhere within
the effective radius of the display. Place cursor Press the MANUAL soft key.
where desired.
2. If not displayed, press the
HIDE/SHOW key to show the Manual shift
radar soft keys.
4. Press the SHIFT soft key.
5. Press the MANUAL soft key to shift. The heading line shifts to the cursor location.
SHIFT appears at right-hand corner of the display.
To cancel shift, press the RADAR DISPLY, SHIFT and OFF soft keys.
2.16.2 Automatic shift

The amount of automatic shift is calculated
Ship's speed
according to ship’s speed, and the amount of X 0.5 = Amount of shift(%)
Shift speed setting
shift is limited to 50% of the range in use. For
example, if you set the shift speed setting for 15 knots and the ship is running at 10 knots
the amount of shift will be about 34%. The formula for determining shift amount is as shown
above. Automatic shift mode is only available in the head-up mode.
2-15
2. RADAR OPERATION
Setting automatic shift maximum speed

3. Press the SHIFT soft key to show the shift soft keys.
4. Press the AUTO S.SPD soft key to display the auto ship AUTO SHIP SPEED
speed setting window.
5. Adjust the Cursor pad or ENTER knob to set the 15
maximum speed of your vessel, and then push the
ENTER knob or the ENTER soft key to set. The setting
range is 1-99 kt and the default setting is 15 kt.
Automatic shift
Press the AUTO soft key. To cancel, press the RADAR DISPLY, SHIFT and OFF soft keys.
2.17 Using the Offset EBL

The offset EBL can be used to predict a potential collision course. It can also be used to
measure the range and bearing between two targets.
2.17.1 Predicting collision course

The procedure below may be used to check if a radar target is on a potential collision
course with your vessel.
1. Press the EBL/VRM key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.

2. Press the EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.
3. Press the OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position, which is
marked with an “X.”
4. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the radar target which looks like it might be
on a collision course with own ship.
5. Push the ENTER knob to fix the origin position.
6. After waiting for a few minutes (at least three minutes), rotate the ENTER knob so the
EBL bisects the target at the new position. If the target tracks along the EBL towards the
center of the display (your ship’s position), the target may be on a collision course with
your vessel.
To cancel the offset EBL, press the OFFSET soft key.
2-16
2. RADAR OPERATION
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M EBL

VRM
H-UP
EBL1
ON
VRM1
ON
Target tracked
here
OFFSET
Initial target
position EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
EBL1 359.9°R
VRM1
45.0°R +
-.---nm .0.240nm
Predicting collision course with the offset EBL
2.17.2 Measuring range & bearing between two targets

The procedure which follows shows how to measure the range and bearing between two
targets, using the targets “A” and “B” in the figure below as an example.
1. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the target “A.”
2. Press the EBL/VRM key to show the EBL/VRM soft keys.
3. Press the EBL1 ON soft key to turn on the EBL1.
4. Press the OFFSET soft key. The origin of EBL1 moves to the cursor position, which is
marked with an “X.”
5. Rotate the ENTER knob so the EBL bisects the target “B.”
6. Push the ENTER knob, then press the VRM1 ON soft key.
7. Rotate the ENTER knob to place the VRM1 on the inner edge of the target “B.”
8. Look at the indications for VRM1 and EBL1 to find the range and bearing between the
two targets.
2-17
2. RADAR OPERATION
To cancel the offset EBL, press the OFFSET soft key.
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M EBL

VRM
H-UP
EBL1
ON
VRM1
Target B ON
OFFSET
Target A
EBL2
ON
VRM2
ON
Bearing and range EBL1 359.9°R

between target A VRM1
45.0°R +
0.125nm 0.24nm
and target B
Measuring range and bearing between two targets
2.18 Echo Trails

Echo trails are simulated afterglow of target echoes that represent their movements relative
or true to own ship. This function is useful for alerting you past possible collision situations.
Echo trail
Sample echo trails
2.18.1 Trail time

2. Press the TARGET soft key.
3. Press the TRAIL soft key to show the trail soft keys.
2-18
2. RADAR OPERATION
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M TRAIL

H-UP
TRAIL
ON /OFF
TRAIL
TIME
GRAD
SINGLE
HIGH
TRAIL
COLOR
RETURN
359.9°R
+
0.24nm
Trail soft keys

4. Press the TRAIL TIME soft key to show the trail time window.
TRAIL TIME
▲
~ 15 seconds
{ 30 seconds
{ 1 minute
{ 3 minutes
{ 6 minutes
{ 15 minutes
{ 30 minutes
{ CONTINUOUS
▼
Trail time window

5. Use the Cursor pad to select time desired.
7. Press the RETURN soft key twice to finish.
2.18.2 Starting echo trails

3. Press the TRAIL soft key.
4. Press the TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select ON.
“TRAIL,” the echo trail time selected and elapsed time appear at the top right-hand corner
of the display. Then, afterglow starts extending from all targets. Trails are restarted when
the range or mode is changed and zoom or shift is turned on.
For continuous trails, the maximum continuous trail time is 99 minutes and 59 seconds.
When the elapsed time clock counts up to that time, the elapsed time display resets to zero
and trails begin again.
To turn off echo trail, press the TRAIL ON/OFF soft key to select OFF at step 4 in the above
procedure.
Trails are restarted when the range or mode is changed and zoom or shift is activated.
2-19
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.18.3 Trail gradation

The echo trails can be shown in single or multiple gradations. Multiple gradation paints the
trails thinner with time, like the afterglow on an analog PPI radar.
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW soft key to show the radar soft keys.
2. Press the TARGET and TRAIL soft keys.
3. Press the GRAD soft key to select SINGLE or MULTI as appropriate.
Multitone Monotone
2.18.4 Trail color

Trails may be shown target trails in blue, yellow, green or white.
2. Press the TARGET, TRAIL and TRAIL COLOR soft keys in that order.
TRAIL COLOR
BLUE
YELLOW
GREEN
WHITE
Trail color window

3. Use the Cursor pad to select the color desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
4. Press the RETURN soft key twice.
2-20
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.19 Echo Stretch

Normally, the reflected echoes from long range targets appear on the display as weaker
and smaller blips even though they are compensated by the radar’s internal circuitry. The
echo stretch function magnifies these small blips in all ranges. Two types of echo stretch
are available: ES LOW which stretches echoes in bearing direction and ES HIGH which
stretches them in both range and bearing directions.
Target
Range
direction
Bearing
Bearing
direction
direction
Echo Stretch OFF "LOW" Echo stretch "HIGH" Echo stretch
Types of echo stretch

This function magnifies not only targets but also sea clutter and radar interference. For this
reason, be sure sea clutter and radar interference are properly suppressed before activating
the echo stretch.
3. Press the E. STR soft key to select HIGH, LOW or OFF as appropriate.
The display shows ES H (High) or ES L (Low) when the echo stretch is on.
2-21
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.20 Echo Averaging

The echo average feature, which requires a Model 18x4/19x4 series network radar as radar
source, effectively suppresses sea clutter. Echoes received from stable targets such as
ships appear on the screen at almost the same position during every rotation of the antenna.
On the other hand, unstable echoes such as sea clutter appear at random positions.
To distinguish real target echoes from sea clutter, echo average performs scan-to-scan
correlation. Correlation is made by storing and averaging echo signals over successive
picture frames. If an echo is solid and stable, it is presented in its normal intensity. Sea
clutter is averaged over successive scans resulting in the reduced brilliance, making it
easier to discriminate real targets from sea clutter.
To properly use the echo average function, it is recommended to first suppress sea clutter
with the A/C SEA control and then do the following:
1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.
3. Press the E. AVG soft key to select desired echo averaging.
OFF: No averaging
LOW: Helps distinguish targets from sea clutter and suppresses brilliance of unstable
echoes.
MED: Distinguishes small stationary targets such as navigation buoys.
HIGH: Stably displays distant targets.
(a) Echo average OFF (b) Echo average ON
Effect of echo averaging
2-22
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.21 Outputting TLL Data

Target position data can be output to units of the network and shown on their plotter screen
with the TLL mark (X). This function requires position and heading data.
1. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the target whose position you wish to
output.
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M TARGET

H-UP
TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
ACQ
Shown with selection of
18x4C/19x4C series network
radar equipped with ARP
TARGET function as source.
INFO
Not shown otherwise.
RETURN
359.9°R
+
0.240nm
TARGET soft keys

4. Press the TLL OUTPUT soft key to output target position data. The TLL mark appears
on the plotter screen at the target’s position the moment the TLL OUTPUT soft key was
pressed. Further, that position is recorded as a waypoint on all NavNet units, under the
youngest empty waypoint number on each NavNet unit.
Note: The screen of the TLL recipient may be temporarily interrupted when receiving TLL
from another NavNet display unit. Press any key to restore normal operation.
2-23
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.22 Guard Alarm

The guard alarm allows the operator to set the desired range and bearing for a guard zone.
When ships, islands, landmasses, etc. violate the guard zone, an audio alarm sounds and
the offending target blinks to call the operator’s attention.
CAUTION
• The alarm should not be relied upon as
the sole means for detecting possible
collision situations.
• A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and GAIN controls

should be properly adjusted to be sure
the alarm system does not overlook
target echoes.
2.22.1 Setting a guard alarm zone

To set a guard alarm zone, set the radar to transmit and do the following:
1. Press the ALARM key.

2. Use the Cursor pad to set the cursor on the top left corner (or top right corner) of the
guard zone you want to set, then press the SET GUARD1 or SET GUARD2 soft key,
depending on which guard zone you want to set.
3. Use the Cursor pad to set the cursor on the bottom right corner (or top left corner) of
the guard zone area, then push the ENTER knob.
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M ALARM .250/SP.125nm 319.9°M ALARM

GUARD 1
H-UP H-UP
SET SET
GUARD1 GUARD1
ERASE
GUARD1
1 2
SET SET
GUARD2 GUARD2
RETURN RETURN
317.2°R
+39.9°R
MOVE +CURSOR TO ENO19.9
ALARM V .125n
ANOTHER CORNER OF
GUARD1 AND PUSH KNOB
+0.230nm B
T
R
.032nm
m .0.230nm
TO SET. L M
(1) Drag cursor to top (or bottom) corner (2) Drag cursor diagonally to bottom (or top)
for guard zone and press the SET corner for guard zone and press the [ENTER]
GUARD1 or SET GUARD2 soft key. knob.
How to set a guard alarm zone
2-24
2. RADAR OPERATION
The equipment then searches for targets inside the guard zone to determine guard alarm
type. If a target is found inside the guard zone, the guard zone type becomes an “Outward
guard alarm,” and any target exiting the guard zone will trigger the audio alarm. If no target
is found, the guard zone type becomes an “Inward guard alarm,” and any targets entering
the guard zone will trigger the audio alarm. The guard alarm type is shown as G1(G2) IN or
G1(G2) OUT.
Note 1: When the radar range is less than the guard zone range “G1 (G2) IN” or “G1 (G2)
OUT” changes to “G1 (G2) ***.” The guard alarm function is not available while this
indication appears.
Note 2: If the network radar is set to standby while the guard alarm is active, the guard
alarm is cancelled. The guard alarm is redisplayed when the radar is set to transmit again.
2.22.2 When the alarm is violated…

Any radar target violating the guard zone will flash, the audio alarm sounds, and the alarm
icon appears in red. Additionally the message “TARGET ENTERED INTO
GUARD1(GUARD2)” or “TARGET LEFT FROM GUARD1(GUARD2)” is displayed at the
bottom of the screen. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm.
2.22.3 Cancelling the guard alarm

1. Press the ALARM key to show the ALARM menu.
2. Press the ERASE GUARD1 or ERASE GUARD2 soft key as appropriate.
2.23 Watchman
2.23.1 How watchman works
The watchman function periodically transmits radar pulses for one minute to check for
targets in a guard zone. If a target is found in the zone, watchman is cancelled, the audio
alarm sounds and the radar continues transmitting. If no target is found the radar goes into
standby for the number of minutes specified on the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. This
feature is useful when you do not need the radar’s function continuously but want to be
alerted to radar targets in a specific area. “WTCH” appears at the top left corner when
Watchman is active.
Tx ST-BY * Tx ST-BY *
1 min 5,10 1 min 5,10

or or
20 min 20 min
Watchman * Beeps emitted just before radar transmits.
starts
How watchman works
2-25
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.23.2 Turning on/off watchman

1. Set a guard zone. (See the paragraph 2.22.)
3. Press the NAV FUNC soft key.
4. Press the W. MAN ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.
Note: When the watchman is activated and no guard zone is active, the message “PLEASE
SET GUARD ZONE. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.” appears. Press any key and then
set a guard zone.
2.23.3 Setting watchman stand-by interval

The watchman standby interval, that is, the number of minutes the radar is in standby, can
be set to 5, 10 or 20 minutes as follows:

3. Select WATCHMAN TIME, then press the EDIT soft key.
WATCHMAN TIME
¤ 5 minutes
¡ 10 minutes
¡ 20 minutes
Watchman time window

4. Select time desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
2-26
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.24 Waypoint Marker

A waypoint marker, showing the location of the destination waypoint set on the plotter, may
be inscribed on the radar display.
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M NAV

FUNC
H-UP
Waypoint
+
W. MAN
marker ON/OFF
WPT MK
ON /OFF
RETURN
359.9°R
+
0.24nm
Waypoint marker
1. If not already shown, press the HIDE/SHOW key to display the radar soft keys.
2. Press the NAV FUNC soft key.
3. Press the WPT MK ON/OFF soft key to select ON or OFF as appropriate.
2-27
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25 ARP, TTM Operation

When the radar source is an ARP-equipped Model 18x4/19x4 series network radar, you can
manually and automatically acquire and track ten targets. Once a target is acquired
automatically or manually it is automatically tracked within 0.1 to 16 nm. If the FURUNO
heading sensor PG-1000 is used, the data sentence “RMC” is necessary.
Alternatively, you can display the tracks of other ships by receiving the data sentence TTM
(Tracked Target Message) via the NETWORK or NMEA port on the display unit. However,
targets cannot be acquired.
Note: When using your unit as remote display, you cannot change the range of the main
radar at the remote display. For the target acquisition, set the range individually.
Usage precautions for ARP
CAUTION CAUTION
No one navigational aid should be relied The plotting accuracy and response of
upon for the safety of vessel and crew. this auto plotter meets IMO standards.
The navigator has the responsibility to Tracking accuracy is affected by the
check all aids available to confirm following:
position. Electronic aids are not
a substitute for basic navigational • Tracking accuracy is affected by course
principles and common sense. change. One to two minutes is required to
restore vectors to full accuracy after an
• This auto plotter automatically tracks an abrupt course change. (The actual
automatically or manually acquired radar amount depends on gyrocompass
target and calculates its course and specifications.)
speed, indicating them by a vector. Since • The amount of tracking delay is inversely
the data generated by the auto plotter proportional to the relative speed of the
are based on what radar targets are target. Delay is on the order of 15-30
selected, the radar must always be seconds for high relative speed; 30-60
optimally tuned for use with the auto seconds for low relative speed.
plotter, to ensure required targets will not
be lost or unwanted targets such as sea Display accuracy is affected by the
returns and noise will not be acquired following:
and tracked.
• Echo intensity
• A target does not always mean a land- • Radar transmission pulsewidth
mass, reef, ships or other surface vessels • Radar bearing error
but can imply returns from sea surface • Gyrocompass error
and clutter. As the level of clutter changes • Course change (own ship or target)
with environment, the operator should
properly adjust the A/C SEA, A/C RAIN
and GAIN controls to be sure target
echoes are not eliminated from the
radar screen.
2-28
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25.1 Activating/deactivating ARP, TTM

1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP
menu.
ARP
ARP TARGET INFO SETUP
INTERNAL ARP
CANCEL ALL TARGETS EDIT
ON
ARP VECTOR MODE
RELATIVE
ARP VECTOR TIME
30 minutes
HISTORY INTERVAL
OFF
CPA
OFF
TCPA
30 seconds
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA RETURN
OFF
TARGET ID NUMBER
OFF
ARP setup menu

2. Select ARP TARGET INFO, then press the EDIT soft key to show the ARP TARGET
INFO window.
ARP TARGET INFO
▲
¤ INTERNAL ARP
¡ EXTERNAL ARP
¡ OFF
▼
ARP TARGET INFO window

3. Select INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP or OFF as appropriate.
EXTERNAL ARP: Receive TTM data sentence via NMEA or NETWORK port. Target
tracks are shown but targets cannot be acquired.
OFF: Turns off the ARP or TTM display.
2.25.2 Acquiring and tracking targets (ARP)

Ten targets may be acquired and tracked manually and automatically. When you attempt to
acquire an 11th target, the message “ARP FULL – ALREADY TRACKING 10 TARGETS!”
appears for five seconds. To acquire another target, terminate tracking of an unnecessary
target as shown in the paragraph “2.25.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets.”
Manual acquisition
When the automatic acquisition (AUTO ACQ. AREA) is set to on, up to five targets may be
acquired manually. If you attempt to acquire a sixth target, the alert message appears.
1. If not already shown, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
2-29
2. RADAR OPERATION

3. Place the cursor on the target to acquire.
4. Press the ACQ soft key.
The plot symbol changes over time as below. A vector appears about one minute after
acquisition, indicating the target’s motion trend.
Vector
01* 01* 01* Target Number

At acquisition 1 min. after 3 min. after
acquisition acquisition
* = Target number shown when TARGET ID NUMBER is
turned on in the ARP SETUP menu.
ARP plot symbols

Note: In case of the acquisition by an external ARP, the acquisition circle mark appears one
minute after acquisition.
Automatic acquisition
The ARP can acquire up to ten targets
Automatic acquisition area
automatically by setting an automatic
acquisition area. When automatic acquisition is
selected after acquiring targets manually, only 45° port 45° starboard
2.0 - 2.5 nm
the remaining capacity for targets may be
automatically acquired. For example, if seven
targets have been manually acquired, three
targets may be automatically acquired.
Automatic acquisition area
1. Press the MENU key to show the main
menu.
2. Press the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP menu.
3. Operate the Cursor pad to select AUTO ACQUISITION AREA.
4. Press the EDIT soft key to show the automatic acquisition area window.
AUTO ACQ. AREA
▲
¡ ON
¤ OFF
▼
Automatic acquisition area window
5. Select ON, then press the ENTER soft key.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu. An acquisition area of 2.0 to 2.5 miles in range
and ±45º on either side of the heading line in bearing appears.
Note: Targets being tracked in automatic acquisition are continuously tracked when
switching to manual acquisition.
2-30
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25.3 Displaying target number (ARP, TTM)

Target number can be shown for ARP and TTM targets as below.
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°T TARGET

H-UP
TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
01
ACQ
ARP
Target TARGET
Number INFO
RETURN
359.9°R
+
0.240nm
ARP target number

2. Press the ARP SETUP soft key.
3. Select TARGET ID NUMBER.
4. Press the EDIT soft key.
5. Select ON or OFF as appropriate.
2.25.4 Terminating tracking of ARP targets

When ten targets have been acquired, no more acquisition occurs unless targets are
cancelled. If you need to acquire additional targets, you must first cancel one or more
individual targets, or all targets, using one of the procedures below.
Terminating tracking of selected targets

1. Place the cursor on the target to terminate tracking.
2. Press the CLEAR key to terminate tracking and erase the target.
Terminating tracking of all targets

CANCEL ALL TARGETS
1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP ▲
soft key. ¡ YES
¤ NO
2. Select CANCEL ALL TARGETS. ▼
4. Select YES. Cancel all targets window
6. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
2-31
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25.5 Setting vector attributes (ARP)

What is a vector?
A vector is a line extending from a tracked target which shows estimated speed and course
of the target. The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the selected
vector time elapses. It can be useful to extend the vector length (time) in order to evaluate
the risk of collision with any target.
Vector
Vector
Vector reference, vector time

You may reference the vectors to North (True, requires heading and speed data) or ship’s
heading (relative) as desired. Vector time can be set to 30 seconds, 1, 3, 6, 15 or 30
minutes.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key to show the ARP SETUP
menu.
2. Operate the Cursor pad to select ARP VECTOR MODE.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the ARP vector mode window.
ARP VECTOR MODE
¤ RELATIVE
¡ TRUE
ARP vector mode window

4. Select TRUE or RELATIVE as appropriate.
6. Select ARP VECTOR TIME, then press the EDIT soft key to show the ARP vector time
window.
ARP VECTOR TIME

▲
¤ 30 seconds
¡ 1 minute
¡ 3 minutes
¡ 6 minutes
¡ 15 minutes
¡ 30 minutes
▼
ARP vector time window

7. Operate the Cursor pad to select vector time among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 15
min and 30 min.
2-32
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25.6 Displaying past position (ARP)

This ARP can display time-spaced dots (maximum ten dots) marking the past positions of
any targets being tracked. You can evaluate a target’s actions by the spacing between dots.
Below are examples of dot spacing and target movement.
(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running (c) Ship reduced (d) Ship increased
straight speed speed
Past position displays

To turn the past position display on or off:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP soft key.
2. Operate the Cursor pad to select HISTORY INTERVAL.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the history interval window.
HISTORY INTERVAL
▲
¤ OFF
¡ 30 seconds
¡ 1 minute
¡ 3 minutes
¡ 6 minutes
▼
History interval window

4. Operate the Cursor pad to select history interval among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min and 6 min,
or select OFF to turn off the past position display.
2-33
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25.7 ARP, TTM target data

You can show motion trends (range, bearing, course, speed, CPA and TCPA) for ARP or
TTM targets.
1. Place the cursor on the target whose data you want to see.
2. If not already displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the radar soft keys.
3. Press the TARGET and TARGET INFO soft keys. The data of the selected target
appears at the bottom left-hand corner of the display. (If an EBL/VRM data box is
displayed the ARP (TTM) data box will be under it.)
To erase ARP/TTM target data, select the corresponding target with the cursor, then press
the CLEAR key.
.250/SP.125nm 319.9°T TARGET

H-UP
Cursor
+ TRAIL
TLL
OUTPUT
ACQ
ARP
01
Target
TARGET
INFO
RETURN
No.01 VECTOR TRUE 15min

359.9°R
CSE 359.9°T SPD 12.5kt +
CPA 2nm TCPA 12.35 0.240nm
CPA and TCPA
Course and Speed
Target No., Vector Reference (True), Vector Time
ARP target data
2-34
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25.8 CPA/TCPA alarm (ARP)

When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm range or
its predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, an audio alarm sounds and the
speaker icon appears (in red). In addition, the target plot symbol of the offending target
changes to a triangle and flashes together with its vector. You may silence the audio alarm
with the CLEAR key. Press the ALARM key and the message “COLLISION ALARM”
appears. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm. The flashing of the
triangle plot symbol continues until you intentionally terminate tracking of the target. The
ARP continuously monitors the predicted range at the Closest Point of Approach (CPA) and
predicted time to CPA (TCPA) of each track to own ship.
This feature helps alert you to targets which may be on a collision course with own ship.
However, it is important that gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and other radar controls are properly
adjusted and the ARP is set up so that it can track targets effectively.
CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size,
tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.
CAUTION
The CPA/TCPA alarm should never be
relied upon as the sole means for detect-
ing the risk of collision. The navigator is
not relieved of the responsibility to keep
visual lookout for avoiding collisions,
whether or not the radar or other plotting
aid is in use.
Follow the steps shown below to set the CPA/TCPA alarm

range: CPA
▲
¤ OFF
1. Press the MENU key followed by the ARP SETUP soft ¡ 0.5nm
¡ 1nm
key. ¡ 2nm
2. Operate the Cursor pad to select CPA. ¡ 3nm
¡ 5nm
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the CPA window. ¡ 6nm
4. Select a CPA limit desired from 0.5 nm, 1 nm, 2 nm, 3 ▼
nm, 5 nm and 6 nm with the Cursor pad.
5. Press the ENTER soft key. The ARP SETUP menu
reappears. CPA distance
6. Operate the Cursor pad to select TCPA. TCPA
7. Press the EDIT soft key to show the TCPA window. ▲
¤ 30 seconds
8. Select a TCPA limit from 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 ¡ 1 minute
¡ 2 minutes
min, 5 min, 6 min and 12 min.
¡ 3 minutes
9. Press the ENTER soft key. ¡ 4 minutes
¡ 5 minutes
¡ 6 minutes
¡ 12 minutes
▼
TCPA time
2-35
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.25.9 Lost target alarm (ARP)

When the system detects a lost target, the target symbol becomes a diamond and tracking
is discontinued after one minute.
01
Lost target mark

Canceling a lost target
1. Place the cursor on the target.
2. Press the CLEAR key.
2-36
2. RADAR OPERATION
2.26 Interpreting the Radar Display

2.26.1 False echoes
Occasionally echo signals appear on the screen at positions where there is no target or
disappear even if there are targets. False target situations may be recognized, however, if
you understand why they are displayed. Typical false echoes are shown below.
Multiple echoes
Multiple echoes occur when a transmitted
pulse returns from a solid object like a True
echo
large ship, bridge, or breakwater. A
second, a third or more echoes may be
observed on the display at double, triple or
other multiples of the actual range of the
target as shown below. Multiple reflection Target
echoes can be reduced and often Own ship
Multiple
removed by decreasing the gain echo
(sensitivity) or properly adjusting the A/C
SEA control. Multiple echoes
Sidelobe echoes
Every time the radar pulse is transmitted,
some radiation escapes on each side of Target A
the beam. This stray RF is called a Target B
“sidelobe.” If a target exists where it can (Spurious) Target B
(True)
be detected by the sidelobes as well as
the main lobe, the side echoes may be
represented on both sides of the true echo
at the same range. Sidelobes show Sidelobe echoes
usually only on short ranges and from
strong targets. They can be reduced
through careful reduction of the gain or Target ship
proper adjustment of the A/C SEA control.
Own
ship
Virtual image ; ;
;;
;;
;; ;;
; ;
;;
;;
;;
;; ;;
;;
;;
A relatively large target close to your ship ;
;; ;
;;
;;
; ;
;;;
may show at two positions on the screen. ;;
; ;;
;
;; ; True
One of them is the true echo directly ;; ; echo
;;
;; ;;
reflected by the target and the other is a ;; ;;
false echo which is caused by the mirror
effect of a large object on or close to your Mirror image
ship as shown in the figure below. If your of target ship
False
ship comes close to a large metal bridge, echo
for example, such a false echo may
temporarily be seen on the screen.
Virtual image Virtual image
2-37
2. RADAR OPERATION
Shadow sector
Funnels, stacks, masts, or derricks in the path of the
Radar
antenna block the radar beam. If the angle subtended antenna
at the antenna is more than a few degrees, a
non-detecting sector or blind spot may be produced.
Within this sector, targets can not be detected.
Radar
mast
2.26.2 SART (Search and Rescue Transponder)

A Search and Rescue Transponder (SART) may be triggered by any X-Band (3 cm) radar
within a range of approximately 8 nm. Each radar pulse received causes it to transmit a
response which is swept repetitively across the complete radar frequency band. When
interrogated, it first sweeps rapidly (0.4 µs) through the band before beginning a relatively
slow sweep (7.5 µs) through the band back to the starting frequency. This process is
repeated for a total of twelve complete cycles. At some point in each sweep, the SART
frequency will match that of the interrogating radar and be within the pass band of the radar
receiver. If the SART is within range, the frequency match during each of the 12 slow
sweeps will produce a response on the radar display, thus a line of 12 dots equally spaced
by about 0.64 nautical miles will be shown.
When the range to the SART is reduced to about 1 nm, the radar display may show also the
12 responses generated during the fast sweeps. These additional dot responses, which
also are equally spaced by 0.64 nm, will be interspersed with the original line of 12 dots.
They will appear slightly weaker and smaller than the original dots.
Screen A: When SART Screen B: When SART
is distant is close
Lines of 12
dots are
displayed in
Echo from SART Radar antenna concentric
beamwidth
Echo from
24 NM 1.5 NM SART
Position of
SART
Own ship
position Own ship
position Position of
SART mark SART
9500 MHz length Radar receiver
9200 MHz bandwidth
Sweep time
7.5 µs
95 µs
Low speed sweep signal

Sweep start
High speed sweep signal
Appearance of SART signal on the radar display
2-38
2. RADAR OPERATION
General procedure for detecting SART response

1. Use the range scale of 6 or 12 nm as the spacing between the SART responses is
about 0.6 nm (1125 m) to distinguish the SART.
2. Turn off the automatic clutter suppression (if applicable).
3. Turn off the Interference Rejector.
2.26.3 Racon (Radar Beacon)

A racon is a radar transponder which emits a characteristic signal when triggered by a
ship’s radar (usually only the 3 centimeter band). The signal may be emitted on the same
frequency as that of the triggering radar, in which case it is superimposed on the ship's
radar display automatically.
The racon signal appears on the PPI as a radial line originating at a point just beyond the
position of the radar beacon or as a Morse code signal (see figure below) displayed radially
from just beyond the beacon.
Racon
Appearance of racon signal on the radar display
2-39
INDEX
This page is intentionally left blank.
2-40
3. PLOTTER OPERATION
3.1 Plotter Displays
You may show the plotter display over the entire screen, in the overlay screen with the
radar display, or in a combination screen.
3.1.1 Full-screen plotter display

Presentation mode
Nav data window (North-up)
(Data changes with NAV soft
key setting and cursor Trip distance
status. For details see next page.)
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9° M TRIP NU

080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
Scale 16.0nm
MARK
ENTRY
SI
M
MODE
NTH UP
Icon (from left)
North Marker NAV Functions for
POS
Chart soft keys
Alarm
Track Hold
Chart Offset 002WP FISH D. BOX
Save ON/ OFF
L/L Offset BRIDGE
Battery
Simulation
(See icon
table on
appendix
Own ship
for details.)
Waypoint name marker
Course bar
Waypoint marker Own ship
track
Full-screen plotter display
Note: When GPS signal error is found, the following occurs depending on the device
feeding position data:
FURUNO BB GPS Receiver: Alarm icon ( ) appears and the aural alarm sounds. Own
ship marker blinks faster.
Other navigator: The message “NO GPS FIX” appears and is accompanied by the aural
alarm and alarm icon. If the GPS signal is missing for more than 90 seconds, the message
“NO POSITION DATA” appears.
Nav data window

The data shown in the nav data window depends on the status of the NAV soft key and the
cursor.
3-1
Presentation
Mode
Latitude, Longitude Bearing to Cursor
Latitude and longitude
of cursor intersection
+ 124°24.
34°24. 3456'N
3456'W
359. 9°M
59.9nm
TRIP
99. 9nm
NU
Cursor Mark Trip Distance

Range to
Cursor
Presentation
Mode
Waypoint data Waypoint Name Bearing to Waypoint Course
(waypoint selected 359. 9°M 359. 9°M TRIP NU
with cursor) 001WPT 19. 9nm 19. 9kt 99. 9nm
Waypoint Mark Range to Waypoint Speed Trip Distance
Presentation
Mode
Own ship NAV Latitude, Longitude Course
position POS
34°24. 3456'N 359. 9°M TRIP NU
soft key 124°24. 3456'W 19. 9kt 99. 9nm
Own Ship Mark Speed Trip Distance
Time-to-Go
to Destination
Destination NAV Waypoint Name Bearing to Waypoint
waypoint WPT
Presentation
data 001WPT 359. 9°M TTG4D02H23M NU
soft key 19. 9nm ETA1st 13:45 Mode
Waypoint Mark Range to Waypoint Estimated Time of
Arrival
Presentation
Mode
Own ship NAV Course, Speed Bearing to Waypoint
speed and S/C
course
CSE 359. 9° M BRG 359. 9 °M TMP 79. 9°F NU
soft key SOG 19. 9kt RNG 99. 9nm DPT 345 ft
Range Water Temp.*, * Requires appropriate

to Depth* sensor.
Turns off NAV Waypoint
nav data OFF
window soft key
Contents of nav data window
3-2
3.1.2 Nav graphic display

The nav graphic display shows the compass display or the wind display depending on the
setting of GRAPHIC METER in the NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP menu. For further
details see paragraph 7.10.
Compass display
The compass display, shown in combination displays, provides steering information. The
compass rose shows two triangles: the red triangle shows own ship’s course and the black
triangle, which moves with ship’s course, shows the bearing to destination waypoint.
The water temperature and depth graphs, which require appropriate sensors, show the
latest 10 minutes of water temperature and depth data. The range of the depth graph is 50
feet and it is automatically adjusted with depth. You may adjust the update interval for these
graphs on the NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP menu.
Destination
waypoint Speed over ground
Range to destination waypoint
Speed through water
RNG 9 9 . 9 n m
003WPT SOG 10.0kt STW 10.0 kt
Time-to-go TTG 0D 9H 59M ETA 23th23:59 Estimated time of
to destination arrival at destination
DPT BRG TMP
Destination 45.2ft 3 5 9 . 9 °M 1 6 . 2 °F
waypoint bearing 0 N 20
Ship's course
(black and filled
(red and filled on
on color model, w
color model, filled
E
hollow on mono-
on monochrome model)
chrome model)
CSE
Depth 50 3 5 9 . 9 °M 10 Water
graph* temperature
graph*
* = Requires appropriate
sensor.
Shown (in red on Direction to steer
color model) when (green on color model)
direction to steer
is "left."
Own ship marker
Bearing scale (For color model, black when within XTE range,
yellow when over; flashes when over XTE range
on monochrome model)
XTE monitor (See next page for description.)
Compass display
3-3
Reading the XTE (cross-track error) monitor

The XTE monitor, located below the compass rose, shows the distance you are off course
and the direction to steer to return to course. The own ship marker moves according to
direction and distance off course. It is shown in black when the amount of cross-track error
is within the XTE monitor range and yellow when it is over. An arrow appears at the right or
left side of the XTE monitor and it shows the direction to steer to return to intended course.
It is shown in red when you should steer left, and green when you should steer right. In the
example on the previous page you would steer right to return to course. To maintain course,
steer the vessel so the own ship marker stays at the center of the XTE monitor.
Soft keys
You can show the soft keys for the compass display by pressing the HIDE/SHOW key.
EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure below for how to
set.
RESET XTE: This soft key may be operated to restart navigation, when a destination is set.
Press the EDIT XT-LMT soft key followed by the RESET XTE soft key. The following
message is displayed.
RESTART NAVGATION TO
CURRENT WPT.
ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Setting the range for the XTE monitor

1. With the compass (or highway) display shown, press the EDIT XT-LMT soft key to
display the following window.
XTE LIMIT
0 .1nm
XTE range setting window

2. Use the Cursor pad to select digit to change. Note that all digits may be cleared by
pressing the CLEAR key.
3. Enter value with the ENTER knob.
4. Push the ENTER knob to set, or press the CANCEL soft key to cancel.
3-4
Anemometer display
The anemometer display shows mostly the same data as the compass display. The wind
meter in the center of the display shows wind speed in the bow direction, in graphic and
analog forms.
RNG 4259nm
QP<01> SOG 20.0kt STW 20.2kt
TTG *D *H *M ETA * *: *
DPT WIND APPARENT TMP
45° S
123ft 12.3 °C
WIND SPEED 12.3kt
Anemometer display
3-5
3.1.3 Highway display

The highway display, shown in the combination display of radar/compass/highway and
plotter/compass/highway, provides a graphic presentation of ship’s track along intended
course. It is useful for monitoring ship’s progress toward a waypoint. The own ship marker
shows the relation between ship and intended course. The XTE monitor shows the direction
and amount your vessel is off course – the arrow shows the direction to steer to return to
your course and the numeric the distance you are off course. Using the figure below as an
example, you would steer right 0.009 nm to return to course. To maintain course, steer the
vessel so the own ship marker stays aligned with the intended course line.
Destination
waypoint Range to destination waypoint
Speed over ground,

RNG 99.9 nm speed through water
WPT001 SOG 10.0kt STW 10.0 kt
Time-to-go TTG 0D 9H 59M ETA 23th23:59 Estimated time of
to destination arrival at destination
WPT001
Destination
waypoint
Intended course
Own ship marker
0.9 nm 0.009nm 0.9 nm XTE range
Shown (in red) when Direction to steer

direction to steer (green)
is "left."
XTE monitor
Highway display
Soft keys
You can show the soft keys for the highway display by pressing the HIDE/SHOW key.
HIWAY CNTRL: On the radar/plotter/compass combination display you can switch control
to the highway display by pressing the CNTRL soft key to show HIWAY.
EDIT XT-LMT: Sets the range for XTE monitor scale. See the procedure on the previous
page for how to set.
RESET XTE: This soft key may be operated to restart navigation, when a destination is set.
Press the EDIT XT-LMT soft key followed by the RESET XTE soft key. See the previous
page for details.
3-6
3.1.4 Nav data display

The nav data display provides comprehensive navigation data, and it is shown in a
three-screen combination display. The user may select what data to display and where to
display it. For details see the paragraph “7.8 Nav Data Display Setup.”
Appropriate sensors are required. Bars ( - -) appear when corresponding sensor is not
connected.
Position
POSITION
34° 34. 5678' N

120° 34. 5678' W
WPT POSITION SOG
34° 14. 5678' N
120° 14. 5678' W 10.0 kt
STW COURSE
10.0 kt 101.6° M
BEARING RANGE
9.2° M 0.18 nm
DEPTH TEMP
1324.1 ft 18.2 °C
Depth Water temperature
Bearing to Range to
Waypoint waypoint
Speed through Course
water
Waypoint Speed over ground
Position
Nav data displays
3-7
3.2 Presentation Mode

Three types of presentation modes are provided for the plotter display: north-up, course-up
and auto course-up. To change the presentation mode, press the HIDE/SHOW key followed
by the MODE soft key. Each press of the key changes the presentation mode and
presentation mode indication (top right-hand corner of the screen) cyclically in the sequence
of North-up, Course-up and Auto course-up.
For C-map model, the sequence is North-up, Perspective, Course-up and Auto course-up
when PERSPECTIVE DISPLAY is set to ON, on the CHART DETAILS menu. (See Chapter
7.)
North-up
North (zero degree) is at the top of the display and own ship is shown with a filled circle.
This mode is useful for long-range navigation.
Course-up
34° 22. 3456'N 359.9° TRIP NU
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
The course-up mode is useful for monitoring 16.0nm MARK

ENTRY
ship’s progress towards a waypoint. The
MODE
destination is at the top of the screen when a NTH UP
NAV
destination is set. When no destination is set, POS
the course or heading is at the top of the screen

WP-002 FISH
at the moment the course-up mode is selected.
D.BOX
A filled triangle marks own ship’s position. BRIDGE ON/ OFF
Note: The data sentences GGA and VTG must

be output from the NavNet display unit North-up
connected to the GPS navigator in order to
correctly orient the own ship marker in the + 34° 22. 3456'N 359.9° M TRIP CU
080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
course-up mode on other NavNet display units. 16.0nm
WPT 001
MARK
ENTRY
MODE
Auto course-up CSE UP
CENTER
The course is at the top of screen at the moment

GO TO
the auto course-up mode is selected. In this CURSOR
D. BOX
mode, the current course is kept at the top of the ON/ OFF
screen when the change is within 22.5 degrees.

For example, if your vessel turns larger than
22.5 degrees to port or starboard, the chart
display will rotate so that your course is pointing Course-up
towards the top of the screen again. A filled 34° 22. 3456'N 359.9° CU
+ M TRIP
triangle marks own ship’s position. 080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
16.0 nm MARK
ENTRY
MODE
AT CU
CENTER
Perspective (C-map only)

GOTO
CURSOR
Chart data is projected in perspective mode, for 3D
D. BOX
simulation, during navigation. ON/ OFF
3-8
Auto course-up
3.3 Shifting the Display

The plotter display can be shifted as below.
1. Use the Cursor pad to locate the cursor at a screen edge. The screen shifts in the
direction opposite of cursor location.
2. To turn off the cursor, press the CENTER soft key. This also returns the own ship
marker to the screen center.
3.4 Chart Scale

Chart scale (range) may be selected with the [RANGE -] or [RANGE +] key. The [-] key
shrinks the chart range (image is expanded); the [+] key expands the cart range (image is
shrunk). The available ranges are as below.
Charts scales
nm 0.125 0.25 0.5 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 512 1024 2048*

km 0.23 0.46 0.93 1.85 3.70 7.41 14.8 29.6 59.3 119 237 474 948 1896 3792
sm 0.144 0.29 0.58 1.15 2.30 4.60 9.21 18.4 36.8 73.7 147 295 589 1178 2356
*: 2046 or 2047 in high latitudes.
3.5 Chart Cards

3.5.1 Chart card overview
Your system reads NAVIONICS GOLD or
C-MAP NT MAX charts, depending on the Icon Meaning
type of display unit you have. Proper card is not inserted or

chart scale is too small. Press
the ZOOM IN soft key to adjust
When you insert a suitable chart card in
chart scale.
the slot and own ship is near any
cartographic object, a chart appears. If a Chart scale is too large.
Operate the RANGE key to
wrong card is inserted or a wrong chart adjust chart scale.
scale is selected, landmasses will appear
hollow. Chart icons appear at the top of the
display to help you select a suitable chart Suitable chart scale is
selected.
scale. The table below shows the chart
icons and their meanings.
Chart icons and their meanings
3-9
3.5.2 Indices and chart enlargement

When the RANGE key is operated, you will see several frames appear on the chart. These
frames are called indices and they show you what parts of the chart can be enlarged in the
current range.
Sample chart (Japan), showing indices

When a chart cannot be displayed:
A chart will not be displayed in the following conditions:
• When the chart scale is too large or too small.
• When scrolling the chart outside the indices.
• When this happens, select proper chart scale.
Note: Indices can be turned on or off. For further details see “Chart border line” on page
7-15 for NAVIONICS charts and page 7-19 for C-MAP charts.
3-10
3.5.3 Navionics charts

Data for aids to navigation
Selected Navionics charts can show buoy and lighthouse data. Simply place the cursor on
the lighthouse or buoy mark.
Lighthouse Buoy
Place the cursor on

a lighthouse or buoy mark.
Lighthouse mark
Port service icons

Selected Navionics GOLD charts show services available at ports, with icons.
1. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the sailboat icon (denotes a port or harbor)
desired.
3. Roll the Cursor pad horizontally to select icon desired at the top of the display. The
services available appear directly below the icon selected.
Detailed information of service
selected
List of services
at the port selected
+ 34° 22. 3456'N 359.9°M TRIP NU Emergency Fueling station

080° 22. 3456'E 19.9 kt 99.9 nm
FIRST AID
medical service
16.0nm
Water Traveler's
supply station service station
Customer Marine
CANCEL
service station equipment service
Sailboat icon (Port) Port Information center
Plotter display, showing port service display
3-11
Current (or tide) data

Some Navionics GOLD charts provide for +Time:
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
12404:35
0.86
24. 3456 W 59.9kt
NU
Current
024nm
calculation of the current (or tide) data for any 0.74
Speed (KT): 0.45ft
date. Additionally it displays the time of sunrise DATE
Angle ( ): 142 0.61
and sunset, moon shape (on current data.)
21/08/02 +00 0.48
1. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on a 0.35

0 4 8 12 16 20 24
current icon ( T ). Max. Time Speed Aug. Slack

KT AT
2. Press the ENTER knob to show the current Flood 4:58 1.2 323 7:58
Ebb 23:15 1.2 323 20:15
Flood 17:15 1.1 145 15:15
window. Ebb 23:15 1.2 323 20:15
3. Press the DATE soft key, and then enter the
Moonphase: FULLY IN 1 DAY
date desired. Sunrise: 05:03 Moonrise: 14:06
RETURN
4. Press the ENTER soft key. Sunset: 19:10 Moonset: 02:15
Current data display

Object information
You can see detailed information about a place selected by the cursor as below.
1. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the location you desire to know more about.
2. Press the ENTER knob to show the OBJECT INFORMATION window.
+124
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
OBJECT INFORMATION
24. 3456 W 59.9kt 024nm
NU
BLOCK AND TACKLE POSITION

BOATYARD 47 16.461'N FIND
LAND AREA 122 25.153'W
DERDGED AREA BRG. & RNG.
DEPTH AREA 191 T 0.549nm
VALUE OF SOUNDING
ROCKS 62.2m
VERTICAL DATUM
MEAN SEA LEVEL
MOVE TRACKBALL <-/->)
RETURN
Object information window

When there are two or more pages, roll the Cursor pad rightward to show the next page.
FIND function
When the OBJECT INFORMATION window is shown, objects can be listed according to
their categories.
1. Press the FIND soft key with the OBJECT INFORMATION window shown.
3-12
+124
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
FIND ...
24. 3456 W 59.9kt 024nm
NU
ENTER
PORT LIST
PORT SERVICE
TIDE STATIONS
CURRENT STATIONS
OBSTRUCTION
ROCKS
CANCEL
FIND window
2. Operate the Cursor pad to choose the category to list, and then press the ENTER soft
key or ENTER knob.
Note: You can show the selected object on the plotter display by pressing the SHOW soft
key.
3-13
3.5.4 C-MAP charts

Cursor and data display
Besides its fundamental functions of providing position data, the cursor can also show
information about caution area, depth area, source of data, etc. on C-MAP charts. In
addition, you can display information about an icon by placing the cursor on it.
1. Move the Cursor pad to turn the cursor on.

2. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the position desired.
3. Push the ENTER knob to open the Objects window.
Objects
Spot Sounding
Depth area
Exclusive economic zone
Military practice area
Restricted area
Source of data
Objects window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select the item desired.
5. Push the ENTER knob to display details for object selected.
Depth area
Depth range value1
0.00 Meters
Depth range value2
1829.00 Meters
Example of caution area window

6. Press the CANCEL soft key to close the window.
7. Press the CANCEL soft key to finish.
Icon data
You may place the cursor on any icon to find information about the selected icon.
1. For example, place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.
3-14
Place the cursor on a lighthouse icon.
+ 34° 22. 3456'N

080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M
19.9 kt
TRIP NU
99.9 nm
16.0nm MARK
ENTRY
MODE
NTH UP
CENTER
GO TO
CURSOR
D. BOX
ON /OFF
Lighthouse icon
2. Push the ENTER knob to show data. For example, the following window appears for a
lighthouse.
Objects
Lighthouse
Tower
Light
Underwater Rock
Depth contour
Depth contour
Depth area
Source of data
Object windows
3. Use the Cursor pad to select the item desired.
4. Push the ENTER knob to display detailed information.
Navigation mark, fixed
Light.
Color
white
Height
7. 00 Meters
Light characteristic
occulting
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
Sample lighthouse data

5. If necessary, move the Cursor pad downward or upward to scroll the window.
6. Press the CANCEL soft key twice to finish.
3-15
Tide information
The C-MAP NT chart card provides for calculation of the tide heights for any date.
Additionally it displays the times of sunrise and sunset.
T
1. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on a Tide icon ( ).
2. Push the ENTER knob to open the Objects window.
OBJECTS
Tide height
Cartographic area
Source of data
Objects window
3. Use the Cursor pad to select Tide height.
4. Push the ENTER knob to open the TIDE window.
+Time:
34 24. 3456 N 359.9
124 04:35L
24. 3456 W 59.9kt
0.86 TIDE
024nm
NU
Objects Height: 0.45ft 0.74
DATE
Draught: 0.65ft 0.61
Port area 28/10/98 -UTC05
Port/Marine 43° 32.860N
0.48
Fuel station Vertical 010° 18.022E 0.35

Water Cursor 0 4 8 12 16 20 24
Port information
Electricity LIVORNO (LEGHORN)
Showers High Water(max) 0.86ft(13:30 L)
Pubric toilets Low Water(min) 0.35ft(21:00 L)

Sunrise 07:52L
Pubric telephone RETURN
Sunset 16:53 L
Tide window
5. Press the DATE soft key to open the DATE window.
6. Use the Cursor pad to position the cursor where
desired, then enter date with the ENTER knob. CHANGE DATE
Repeat to enter complete date.
(DAY. MONTH. YEAR)
7. Push the ENTER knob to show the tidal graph for 2 8. 03. 2005
entered date.
8. Use the Cursor pad to locate the vertical cursor on LIMIT: 31.12.2099
the hour desired.
9. Use the Cursor pad to shift the horizontal cursor to
C-map, port service display
select draught.
10. See the time, height and draught indications in left of the
tide graph for tide information.
11. Press the CANCEL soft key twice to close the TIDE
window.
3-16
Port service icons

Selected C-MAP shows services available at ports, with lists. Objects
1. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the sailboat Port area
icon (denotes a port or harbor) desired. Port/Marine
Fuel station
Water
The services available appear. Electricity
3. Press the CANCEL soft key. Showers
Public toilets
Note: When “Port/Marine” is selected, you can show a Public telephone
picture of the port selected, provided such data is available
on the chart card.
FIND function
When the Objects window is shown, objects can be listed according to their categories.
1. Press the FIND soft key with the Object window.

2. Operate the Cursor pad to choose the category to list, and then press the ENTER soft
key or ENTER knob.
A list appears.
3. Press the CANCEL key twice to finish.
3-17
3.6 Working with Track

Your ship’s track is plotted on the screen using navigation data fed from position-fixing
equipment. This section shows you what you can do with track, from turning it on or off to
changing its plotting interval. In the default setting, own ship’s track is turned on and is
displayed in red.
3.6.1 Displaying track

Own ship track
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP and TRACKS & MARKS
CONTROL soft keys to open the TRACK CONTROL menu.
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP TRACK

CONTROL
ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR
RED EDIT
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY
OFF
TRACK
TARGET TRACK COLOR RESUME
WHITE
INTERVAL
TIME ERASE
T&M
TIME INTERVAL
00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL MARK
00.10nm SETUP
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)
2000POINTS
RETURN
(MARK MEMORY)
(6000)POINTS
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS

TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
Track control menu

2. Use the Cursor pad to select OWN SHIP TRACK DISP.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the track display window.
4. Use the Cursor pad to select ON (default setting) or OFF as appropriate.
Note: The number of track and mark points used appears at the SHIP’S TRACK STATUS
window on the TRACK CONTROL menu. Using the figure above as an example, 1234
points of track and 9 marks have been recorded.
Target track
Target track, NMEA format TTM (Tracked Target Message) data sentence, may be turned
on or off as desired. The default setting is ON.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select TARGET TRACK DISPLAY.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the target track display window.
3-18
4. Use the Cursor pad to select one of the following:

ON or OFF (no ARP or AIS): Turn on or off target tracks
ARP ONLY (ARP equipped): Show only ARP tracks.
AIS ONLY (AIS equipped): Show only AIS tracks.
BOTH: Show both ARP and AIS tracks.
3.6.2 Stopping, restarting plotting of own ship track

When your boat is at anchor or returning to port you probably won’t need to record its track.
You can stop recording the track, to conserve the track memory, as follows:
TRACK TRACK
▲
OWN SHIP TRACK DISP OWN SHIP TRACK DISP
▲
CONTROL CONTROL
ON ON
OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR
RED EDIT RED EDIT
TARGET TRACK DISPLAY TRACK TARGET TRACK DISPLAY
OFF RESUME OFF
TRACK TRACK
TARGET TRACK COLOR RESUME TARGET TRACK COLOR HALT
WHITE WHITE
INTERVAL INTERVAL
ERASE ERASE
TIME TIME T&M
T&M
TIME INTERVAL TRACK
TIME INTERVAL
00m10s HALT 00m10s
DISTANCE INTERVAL MARK DISTANCE INTERVAL MARK
00.10nm SETUP 00.10nm SETUP
MEMORY(TRACK & MARK) MEMORY(TRACK & MARK)
2000POINTS 2000POINTS
RETURN RETURN
(MARK MEMORY) (MARK MEMORY)
(6000)POINTS (6000)POINTS
SHIP’S TRACK STATUS SHIP’S TRACK STATUS

TRACKING NOT TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000 TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000 MARK : 9/6000
Track is plotted Track not plotted
Track control menu

2. Press the TRACK RESUME soft key. The soft key now shows “TRACK HALT” and the
indication “TRACKING” in the SHIP’S TRACK STATUS window changes to “NOT
TRACKING.” In addition, the icon “H” is displayed at the top of the plotter display and
own ship marker becomes a hollow circle. To restart plotting the track, press the TRACK
HALT soft key
3.6.3 Changing track color

Track can be displayed in red (default setting), yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and
white. It can be useful to change track color on a regular basis to discriminate between
previous day’s track, etc.
3-19
Own ship’s track

2. Use the Cursor pad to select OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track color window.
TRACK COLOR
▲
¤ RED
¡ YELLOW
¡ GREEN
¡ LIGHT BLUE
¡ PURPLE
¡ BLUE
¡ WHITE
▼
Own ship track color window

4. Use the Cursor pad to select the color desired.
Target track
Like own ship’s track, target tracks can be displayed in red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple,
blue and white (default setting).
2. Use the Cursor pad to select TARGET TRACK COLOR.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track color window.
4. Use the Cursor pad to select the color desired.
3.6.4 Track plotting method and interval for own ship track
In drawing the own ship track, first the ship’s position fed from position-fixing equipment is
stored into the unit’s memory at an interval of time or distance. A shorter interval provides
for better reconstruction of the track, but the storage time of the track is reduced. When the
track memory becomes full, the oldest track is erased to make room for the latest.
Track plotting method

Track may be plotted by time or distance. The default setting is “time.”
2. Use the Cursor pad to select INTERVAL.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the plot window.
3-20
INTERVAL
▲
¤ TIME
¡ DISTANCE
▼
Interval window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select TIME or DISTANCE as appropriate. Distance is useful for
conserving track memory, since no track is recorded when the boat is stationary.
Track plotting interval

2. Use the Cursor pad to select TIME INTERVAL or DISTANCE INTERVAL as
appropriate.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the time or distance interval window, depending on
what you selected at step 2.
TIME INTERVAL Setting range: 0 min 1 sec (continuous) - 99 min 59 sec

Default setting: 10 sec
00m10s
(When selecting TIME INTERVAL.)
Setting range: 0.00 nm (continuous) - 99.99 nm (km, sm)

DISTANCE INTERVAL
Default setting: 0.1 nm
00.10nm
(When selecting DISTANCE INTERVAL.)
Interval windows
4. Use the Cursor pad to select digit and enter value with the ENTER knob. The CLEAR
soft key functions to clear an entire line of data.
5. Push the ENTER knob or ENTER soft key.
3.6.5 Changing own ship track/mark distribution setting

The equipment stores a total of 8000 points of track and marks. This amount may be
distributed as desired, and the default setting is 2000 points of track and 6000 points for
marks.
When you change the track memory setting, all tracks and marks in the memory are erased.
If necessary save the data to a memory card. For further details see the paragraph “6.1.2
Saving data to a memory card.”
2. Use the Cursor pad to select MEMORY (TRACK & MARK).
3-21
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the track memory window.
TRACK MEMORY
2000/8000 POINTS
Track memory window

4. Use the Cursor pad to select digit and use the ENTER knob to enter value.
5. Push the ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob. You are asked if you are sure to change
the track memory capacity.
3.6.6 Erasing track

This paragraph shows you how to erase own ship’s track and target tracks. You can erase
ship’s track three ways: collectively, by color and by area.
Erasing own ship track by area

You can erase own ship’s track by area as below. This feature is not available when the
overlay mode is in use.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL
and ERASE T & M soft keys to show the ERASE menu.
ERASE ALL TRACKS ERASE
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA

EDIT
ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR
ERASE TARGET TRACKS
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES
ERASE MARKS BY AREA
RETURN
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
Erase menu
2. Use the Cursor pad to select ERASE TRACKS BY AREA, then press the EDIT soft key.
The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.
3. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area which you
want to ease track from.
4. Press the START soft key or the ENTER knob.
3-22
5. Move the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which you want to ease
track from.
6. Press the END soft key or the ENTER knob. You are asked if you are sure to delete the
track.
7. Push the ENTER knob to delete the track selected.
8. Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing own ship track by color

You may erase own ship’s track by color as follows:
2. Use the Cursor pad to select ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR, then press the EDIT soft
key.
ERASE TRK BY COLOR

▲
¤ RED
¡ YELLOW
¡ GREEN
¡ LIGHT BLUE
¡ PURPLE
¡ BLUE
¡ WHITE
▼
Erase track by color window

3. Use the Cursor pad to select the color you want to erase, then push the ENTER knob.
4. Push the ENTER knob to erase the track color selected.
Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all own ship track

2. Use the Cursor pad to select ERASE ALL TRACKS, then press the EDIT soft key.
3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all own ship track.
Press the MENU key twice to close the menu.
Erasing all target tracks

2. Use the Cursor pad to select ERASE TARGET TRACKS, then press the EDIT soft key.
3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all target tracks.
3-23
3.7 Marks, Lines

Marks are useful for denoting important points such as a good fishing spot. Marks can be
inscribed in seven shapes and seven colors: Red, yellow, green, light-blue, purple, blue and
white.
{ ✕
3.7.1 Entering a mark, line
1. Place the cursor where you want a mark to appear.
2. Press the SHOW/HIDE key (if necessary) followed by the MARK ENTRY soft key.
The mark is inscribed in the size, color and shape selected on the mark & line menu. The
default mark attributes are size, large; color, yellow, and shape, hollow circle (○).
Note: This function can be changed to entering the quick point. For detail, see page 7-10.
3.7.2 Changing mark attributes

You can select the shape, size and color for marks on the MARKS & LINES menu.

2. Press the CHART SETUP, TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL and MARK SETUP soft keys
to show the MARKS & LINES menu.
MARKS &
MARKS/LINES COLOR LINES
YELLOW
MARKS SHAPE EDIT
{
LINES STYLE
.
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
RETURN
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
Marks & lines menu

3. Select MARKS/LINES COLOR, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Use the Cursor pad to choose color desired (default setting: yellow).
6. Select MARKS SHAPE, then press the EDIT soft key.
3-24
MARKS SHAPE
▲
¤ ¡
¡
¡
¡ ✕
¡
¡
¡
▼
Marks shape window
7. Use the Cursor pad to select mark shape desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
8. Select MARKS SIZE, then press the EDIT soft key.
9. Use the Cursor pad to select LARGE (default setting) or SMALL as appropriate.
3.7.3 Selecting line type

You may inscribe lines to denote good fishing spots, areas of special interest, etc. You can
even construct simple charts.
and MARK SETUP soft keys to show the MARKS & LINES menu.
MARKS &
MARKS/LINES COLOR LINES
YELLOW
MARKS SHAPE EDIT
¡
LINES STYLE
.
MARKS SIZE
LARGE
RETURN
TRACKING
TRACK: 1234/2000
MARK : 9/6000
Marks & lines menu

2. Select LINES STYLE, then press the EDIT soft key.
LINES STYLE
▲
¤
¡
¡ - - - -
¡
▼
Lines style window
3-25
3. Use the Cursor pad to select line style desired, then press the ENTER soft key. The
line style “dot” disables line drawing. Edge of lines is determined by mark shape. For
example, selecting the circle shape will join lines with a circle.
3.7.4 Erasing marks, lines

Erasing an individual mark
1. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the mark you want to erase.
2. Press the CLEAR key to erase the mark.
Erasing an individual line

Place the cursor on an end of the line to erase, then press the CLEAR key. Placing the
cursor at the intersecting point of two line segments will erase both line segments.
Erasing marks, lines by area

This feature is not available when the overlay mode is in use.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select ERASE MARKS BY AREA, then press the EDIT soft key.
The menu is erased and the plotter display appears.
3. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor at the top left-hand corner of the area which you
want to erase marks and lines from.
4. Press the START soft key or the ENTER knob.
5. Move the cursor to the bottom right-hand corner of the area which you want to erase
marks and lines from.
6. Press the END soft key or the ENTER knob. You are asked if you are sure to delete the
marks/lines selected. Press the ENTER knob to delete.
Erasing all marks, lines

You can erase all marks and lines collectively. Be absolutely sure you want to erase all
marks and lines - erased marks and lines cannot be restored.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES, then press the EDIT soft
key.
3. Push the ENTER knob to erase all marks and lines.
3-26
3.8 Waypoints
In navigation terminology, a waypoint is a particular location on a voyage whether it be a
starting, intermediate or destination point. A waypoint is the simplest piece of information
your equipment requires to get you to a destination, in the shortest distance possible.
This unit has 999 waypoints into which you can enter position information. You may enter a
waypoint five ways: at own ship position, at MOB position (see page 1-13 for details), by
cursor, by range and bearing, and through the waypoint list (manual input of latitude and
longitude).
3.8.1 Entering waypoints

Entering a waypoint at own ship position
Press the SAVE/MOB key momentarily to store your position as a waypoint. This new
waypoint is saved to the waypoint list, under the youngest empty waypoint number.
Entering a waypoint with the cursor

2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft
keys. The plotter display appears.
3. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor where you want to enter a waypoint.
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows waypoint
mark shape, waypoint name, comment (default: time and date), position of waypoint and
proximity alarm radius.
NEW
WPT
MARK NAME
0 0 1 W 359.9°
PT
▲
SELECT
34°44.000'N
MARK
135°21.000'W 0.00nm
COMMENT
002WPT COORD
02:36 01JAN01 TYPE
00:00 01JAN00
POSITION
34°44.000'N 359.9° N < - -> S
L135°21.000'W
AT 0.00nm E < - -> W
34° 12. 134'N
003WPT
LON 00:00 01JAN00 SAVE
134° 12. 345'W
34°44.000'N 359.9°
135°21.000'W 0.00nm
RETURN
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS

0. 00nm
Waypoint window
5. If you do not need to change the waypoint data, press the SAVE soft key to register
the waypoint. The steps which follow show you how to change waypoint data.
6. Press the SELECT MARK soft key.
7. Press the MARK SHAPE soft key to open the mark shape selection window.
3-27
SELECT MARK
Waypoint mark shape selection window

8. Operate the Cursor pad to select shape desired.
10. Press the SELECT MARK and MARK COLOR soft keys in that order to open the
waypoint mark color selection window. Select the color desired, then press the ENTER
soft key.
SELECT COLOR
▲
¤ RED
¡ YELLOW
¡ GREEN
¡ LIGHT BLUE
¡ PURPLE
¡ BLUE
¡ WHITE
▼
Waypoint mark color selection window

Note: You cannot change the shape and color of a waypoint when the proximity alarm
radius for it is other than “zero.” To change shape or color, enter all zeroes as the
proximity alarm radius.
11. You can change the name (6 characters), comment (13 characters), L/L position and the
proximity alarm radius for a waypoint as follows:
Use the Cursor pad to select the NAME, COMMENT, position box or PROXIMITY ALARM
RADIUS field. (“Proximity alarm radius” provides for audio and visual alarms when your
boat nears a waypoint by the distance specified. The proximity alarm must be turned on
in the ALARM menu to use this feature. For details see the paragraph 3.11.6.)
Use the Cursor pad to select location.
Enter appropriate alphanumeric character with the ENTER knob.
12. Press the SAVE soft key to register the waypoint.
13. Enter another waypoint, or press the MENU key to close the menu.
3-28
Entering a waypoint by range and bearing

This method is useful when you want to enter a waypoint using range and bearing to a
target found on a radar.

2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and WAYPOINT BY RNG & BRG soft
keys.
3. A red “X” appears at own ship position, and it is the origin point for range and bearing.
Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the location desired. Range and bearing
from own ship to the cursor appear at the top of the display.
Note: The origin point of range and bearing can be shifted to the location desired.
Operate the Cursor pad to select location, then press the START POINT soft key.
4. Press the NEW WPT soft key. The waypoint window appears and it shows mark shape,
waypoint name, comment (default: date and time), position of waypoint and proximity
alarm radius.
NEW
WPT
MARK NAME
0 0 1 W 359.9°
PT
▲
SELECT
34°44.000'N
MARK
135°21.000'W 0.00nm
COMMENT
002WPT COORD
02:36 01JAN01 TYPE
00:00 01JAN00
POSITION
34°44.000'N 359.9° N < - -> S
L135°21.000'W
AT 0.00nm E < - -> W
34° 12. 134'N
003WPT
LON 00:00 01JAN00 SAVE
134° 12. 345'W
34°44.000'N 359.9°
135°21.000'W 0.00nm
RETURN
PROXIMITY ALARM RADIUS

0. 00nm
Waypoint window
5. If necessary, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 through 11 in
“Entering a waypoint with the cursor” on page 3-28.
7. Enter another waypoint as above, or press the MENU key to finish.
Entering a waypoint from the waypoint list

You can manually enter waypoint position from the waypoint list as follows:

2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft keys.
3. Press the LOCAL LIST (lists waypoints in order from nearest to furthest, maximum 32
points) or ALPHANUMERIC LIST (lists waypoints in ALPHANUMERIC order) soft key.
3-29
WPT WPT
ALPHA LOCAL
ABALONE FISH
00:00 01JAN01 00:00 01JAN01
▲
▲
▲ 35°47.010'N 350.9° GOTO 34°41.000'N 065.9°
1.83 nm
GOTO
135°21.000'W 3.80 nm 135°21.030'W
CRAB NEW CRAB NEW

00:00 01JAN01 WPT 00:00 01JAN01 WPT
34°42.000'N 050.9° 34°42.000'N 050.9°
135°21.050'W 1.98 nm 135°21.050'W 1.98 nm
EDIT EDIT
WPT ABALONE WPT
FISH
00:00 01JAN01 00:00 01JAN01
34°41.000'N 065.9° 35°47.010'N 350.9°
1.83 nm ERASE ERASE
135°21.030'W 135°21.000'W 3.80 nm
WPT WPT
LOBSTER LOBSTER
00:00 01JAN01 00:00 01JAN01
38°44.300'N 144.9° RETURN 144.9°
RETURN
38°44.300'N
135°21.010'W 4.93nm 135°21.010'W 4.93nm
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO

SEARCH FOR
---
Alphanumeric waypoint list Local waypoint list
Alphanumeric and local waypoint lists

4. Press the NEW WPT soft key to show the waypoint window (see the figure on the
previous page). Own ship position is shown in the position box.
5. Select the position box and enter position desired.
6. If desired, change waypoint data following the instructions from step 6 in “Entering a
waypoint with the cursor” on page 3-28.
3.8.2 Editing waypoint data

Waypoint data may be edited from the waypoint list or directly from the plotter display.
Editing waypoint data from the waypoint list

3. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as appropriate.
4. Use the Cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to edit.
5. Press the EDIT WPT soft key.
6. Edit data as appropriate.
7. Press the SAVE soft key.
3-30
Editing a waypoint from the plotter display

You may edit waypoints from the plotter display as follows:
1. Press the MENU key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft key
to open the waypoint menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.
3. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want to change.
A flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
4. Press the EDIT/MOVE soft key. Three soft keys replace the EDIT/MOVE soft key:
EDIT WPT: Edit from the waypoint entry window.
MOVE WPT: Move waypoint to new position with the cursor.
ERASE WPT: Erase waypoint. See paragraph 3.8.3.
5. Press the appropriate soft key. For the “EDIT WPT,” the waypoint entry window
appears; edit data as appropriate. For “MOVE WPT,” do the following:
a) Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the location desired for the waypoint. A
line connects previous position and new position.
b) Push the ENTER knob. The waypoint moves to the cursor position and its position is
changed on the waypoint list. If the waypoint is set as destination or is part of a route,
you are asked if you are sure to move the waypoint. In this case, push the ENTER
knob to move the waypoint, or press the CLEAR key to cancel.
6. Press the MENU key to finish.
Range and bearing from

own ship to cursor
+ 34° 22. 3456'N

080° 22. 3456'E
359.9°M TRIP NU
59.9 nm 99.9 nm
16.0nm
Press to alternately display

(1) Select waypoint to move, range/bearing from own ship
then press EDIT/MOVE RNG to cursor, range/bearing from
and MOVE WPT soft keys. FISH
BRG original waypoint position to
cursor position.
(2) Drag cursor to new position, Below is an example of the
then push the [ENTER] knob. range/bearing from original
CANCEL waypoint position to cursor
position.
BRIDGE
WP-002
+ 34° 22. 3456’N
080° 22. 3456’E
FROM
FISH
5.3°
1.45 nm
Plotter display
3-31
3.8.3 Erasing waypoints

Erasing a waypoint directly from the plotter display
1. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to erase. A
flashing diamond mark appears over the waypoint when the waypoint is correctly
selected.
2. Press the CLEAR key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
3. Push the ENTER knob. The waypoint is erased from the plotter screen and the waypoint
list.
Erasing a waypoint from the menu

1. Press the MENU key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and WAYPOINTS soft key
to open the waypoint menu.
2. Press the WAYPOINT BY CURSOR soft key.
3. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint which you want to erase. A
flashing diamond mark appears on the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
4. Press the EDIT/MOVE soft key followed by the ERASE WPT soft key. You are asked if
you are sure to erase the waypoint.
5. Push the ENTER knob to erase the waypoint.
6. Press the MENU key to close the menu. The waypoint is erased from the plotter screen
and the waypoint list.
Erasing a waypoint from the waypoint list

3. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key.
4. Use the Cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to erase.
5. Press the ERASE WPT soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the waypoint.
6. Push the ENTER knob. The waypoint is erased from both the waypoint list and the
plotter screen (if it is currently displayed).
3-32
3.8.4 Changing waypoint mark size (Navionics GOLD)

You may change the size of all waypoint marks to small or large (default), or you may turn
them off.

2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART CONFIGURATION soft keys.
CHART
LAT LON GRID
CONFIG
GREEN
TEXT INFORMATION
EDIT
ON
WAYPOINTS
LARGE CNTOUR
WAYPOINT NAMES LINE
ON
CHART BORDER LINES
ON
LANDMASS*
NEXT
BRT YELLOW
PAGE
NAVAIDS*
ON
LIGHT SECTOR INFO RETURN
ON
OTHER SYMBOLS*
WHITE
*: Not used.
Chart details menu

3. Use the Cursor pad to select WAYPOINTS.
5. Use the Cursor pad to select LARGE, SMALL or OFF.
LARGE: Shows mark in actual shape.
SMALL: Displays all waypoints with an “X” regardless of mark shape selected.
OFF: Turns off all waypoints and their names. Waypoints currently used in navigation
are shown regardless of this setting.
3-33
3.8.5 Searching waypoints

You can search for a waypoint through the alphanumeric waypoint list as follows:

2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES, WAYPOINTS and ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft keys
to show the alphanumeric list.
WPT
ALPHA
ABALONE
00:00 01JAN01
▲
▲ 35°47.010'N 350.9° GOTO
135°21.000'W 3.80 nm
CRAB NEW
00:00 01JAN01 WPT
34°42.000'N 050.9°
135°21.050'W 1.98 nm
EDIT
WPT
FISH
00:00 01JAN01
34°41.000'N 065.9°
1.83 nm ERASE
135°21.030'W
WPT
LOBSTER
00:00 01JAN01
38°44.300'N 144.9° RETURN
135°21.010'W 4.93nm
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO

SEARCH FOR
---
Search window
Alphanumeric list
3. Use the Cursor pad and the ENTER knob to enter up to three alphanumeric characters
in the search window. Then, the waypoint searched appears at the top of the screen.
3-34
3.9 Routes
Often a trip from one place to another involves several course changes, requiring a series
of route points (waypoints) which you navigate to, one after another. The sequence of
waypoints leading to the ultimate destination is called a route. Your unit can automatically
advance to the next waypoint on a route, so you do not have to change the destination
waypoint repeatedly.
You can store up to 200 routes, and a route may have 35 waypoints.
3.9.1 Creating routes

Entering a route with existing waypoints
This method constructs routes by using existing waypoints.

2. Press the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES soft key.
3. Press the ROUTES soft key to open the ROUTE menu. (No data will be shown if there
are no routes entered.)
001 ROUTE
▲
Total length of route LENGTH WAYPOINTS

25.6 nm 35
GOTO
Route name 002

NEW
LENGTH WAYPOINTS
2
ROUTE
56.7 nm
003 EDIT
ROUTE
LENGTH WAYPOINTS
21.1 nm 3 Number of waypoints
ERASE
004 ROUTE in route
LENGTH WAYPOINTS
21.1 nm 3
RETURN
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
Route menu
4. Press the NEW ROUTE soft key to open the new route entry screen.
NEW
ROUTE
ROUTE NAME
001 PLOT
COMMENT
LOCAL
LIST
ALPHA
LIST
CONECT
CANCEL
New route entry screen
3-35
5. If desired you can change the route name shown and/or add a comment. A route name
may consist of six characters; comment, 13 characters.
6. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHA LIST soft key to open the waypoint list.
7. Use the Cursor pad to select a waypoint, then press the ADD WPT soft key to add it to
the route.
8. Repeat step 7 to complete the route.
Note: To clear last-entered waypoint, press the ERASE LST WP soft key. Each press of
this key deletes the last waypoint entered.
9. Press the SAVE soft key to register the route.
Entering a route with the cursor

This method allows you to construct a route directly from the plotter display, using existing
waypoints or new positions. Any new position will be saved as a waypoint, under the
youngest empty waypoint number.
1. Follow steps 1-5 in “Entering a route from the route list” on the previous page.
2. Press the PLOT soft key to show the plotter display.
3. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (ADD WP soft key
appears) or new location (ADD NEW WP soft key appears).
4. Press the ADD WP soft key (or ADD NEW WP soft key).
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.
6. Push the ENTER knob to register the route.
Creating voyage-based routes

You can create routes based on your ship’s track. The route can be created automatically
by time or distance, or manually. This feature is useful when you wish to retrace previous
track.
The “SAVE” icon (SAVE) appears at the top of the screen when a voyage-based route is
being created.

3. Press the CREATE VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft key.
3-36
SAVE
001 ROUTE
▲
LENGTH WAYPOINTS
25.6 nm 35
NEW
002
SELECT
LENGTH WAYPOINTS
2
ROUTE
56.7 nm
003
LENGTH WAYPOINTS
21.1 nm 3
004
LENGTH WAYPOINTS
21.1 nm 3
RETURN
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
SEARCH FOR
---
Save route menu

4. Press the NEW soft key to show the new route window.
Note: If you want to tack voyage-based points onto the end of an existing route, select
the route with the Cursor pad, then press the SELECT ROUTE soft key instead of the
NEW soft key. Then, go to step 6.
SAVE
ROUTE NAME ROUTE
Next consecutive route number 006 BCKTRK

TIME
COMMENT
BCKTRK
DIST
USE FURUNO BACK TRACK FUNCTION MANUAL

TO AUTOMATICALLY CREATE ROUTE
BY TIME OR DISTANCE.
CANCEL
Save route window

5. If required, you may change the route name and enter a comment.
6. Choose how to record points for your route, by time, by range or manual entry, by
pressing BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK RANGE or MANUAL soft key as appropriate. For
manual entry, go to step 8. For BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK DIST one of the following
displays appears.
TIME INTERVAL DISTANCE INTERVAL
00h01m 00.1nm
(When selecting BCKTRK TIME.) (When selecting BCKTRK DIST.)
Displays for entry of time, distance interval
3-37
7. Enter interval desired with the Cursor pad and the ENTER knob. Press the START
LOG and RETURN soft keys followed by the MENU key to close the menu. At this
moment, a voyage-based route will be created.
8. For manual entry of waypoints, do the following:
a) Press the SAVE/MOB key momentarily to enter a waypoint mark at own ship position. A
new waypoint is created under the youngest empty waypoint number and added to the
route. (At this time you may close the SAVE ROUTE screen by pressing the RETURN
soft key followed by the MENU key.)
b) Repeat step a) as necessary. 35 waypoints may be entered.
To stop recording waypoints and save the route

You can stop recording waypoints and save the route as shown in the procedure below.
When 35 waypoints have been entered the message “Total 35 WPTS have been already
registered in the route. Stop creating voyage-based route.” is displayed. In this case,
automatically creating voyage-based route stops.
1. Press the MENU key followed by the WAYPOINTS/ROUTES and CREATE

VOYAGE-BASED ROUTE soft keys.
2. Press the FINISH LOG soft key to stop recording waypoints and save the route.
3.9.2 Connecting routes

Two routes which you have created can be connected as follows to form a new route.

3. Press the ROUTES soft key.
4. Press the NEW ROUTE soft key.
5. If desired enter route name and comment.
6. Press the CONECT soft key.
7. Use the Cursor pad and the ENTER knob to enter the route name for the first route,
beneath FIRST in the connect route window.
NEW
ROUTE NAME ROUTE
001 F < -- > R
COMMENT
CONNECT ROUTE
FIRST SECOND
______ ______
FORWARD FORWARD SAVE
CANCEL
Connect route window
3-38
8. Press the F<− −>R soft key to select direction to follow the waypoints of the route,
forward or reverse.
9. Enter the route name of the second route as you did for the first route.
10. Press the SAVE soft key.
Note: The maximum number of waypoints in a route is 35. If this number is exceeded an
error message appears. In this case, delete waypoints in one or both routes so the total
number of waypoints does not exceed 35.
3.9.3 Inserting waypoints

Waypoints can be inserted in a route as follows:
Inserting a waypoint from the route list

4. Use the Cursor pad to select a route.
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key. The route name screen appears.
6. Press the LOCAL LIST soft key.
EDIT
ROUTE NAME: 001 ROUTE
COMMENT:
01 34°44.111'N LEG INSERT
▲
001WPT 135°21.134'W WPT

29.9°
02 34°43.432'N 12.0nm
REMOVE
003WPT 135°41.456'W 159.9°
WPT
03 34°14.124'N 6.00nm
002WPT 135°21.567'W CHANGE

50.5°
WPT
04 34°44.569'N 29.8nm
005WPT 135°21.152'W
359.9°
3.0nm
COORD
05 34°54.124'N
TYPE
008WPT 135°21.888'W
RETURN
LOCAL LIST
Edit route menu 001 001WPT

▲
34°44.111'N
7. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor at the location 135°21.134'W
where you want to insert a waypoint. 002 002WPT
8. Press the INSERT WPT or CHANGE WPT soft key as 34°43.432'N
135°41.456'W
appropriate. The local waypoint list appears.
003 003WPT
9. Use the Cursor pad to select the waypoint you want to
34°14.124'N
insert. (You can switch between the local list and 135°21.567'W
alphanumeric list by using the LOCAL LIST and ALPHA 004 004WPT
LIST soft keys.) 34°34.490'N
10. Press the SELECT WPT or CHANGE WPT soft key, 135°51.387'W
whichever is displayed.
Waypoint list for editing a
route (local list)
3-39
Inserting a waypoint from the plotter display

Inserting a waypoint before first waypoint or after last waypoint in a route
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key.
6. Press the PLOT soft key to show the plotter screen.
7. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the first (or last) waypoint of the route. A
flashing diamond appears over the waypoint when it is correctly selected.
8. Press the ADD TO START soft key or the ADD TO END soft key depending on the
waypoint you selected at step 7.
9. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on an existing waypoint (ADD WPT soft key
appears) or new location (ADD NEW WP soft key appears).
10. Press the ADD WPT soft key (ADD NEW WP soft key).
Inserting a waypoint in an intermediate location on a route

1. Follow steps 1 through 6 in “Inserting a waypoint before the first or last waypoint in a
route.”
2. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on a line connecting waypoints. The SPLIT
LEG soft key appears and the line flashes when it is correctly selected.
3. Press the SPLIT LEG soft key.
4. Move the cursor to a new location or select an existing waypoint, in which case the
INSERT WPT soft key replaces the INSERT NEW WP soft key.
5. Press the INSERT WPT soft key (INSERT NEW WP soft key).
3.9.4 Removing waypoints from a route

Removing a waypoint from the route list
4. Select a route.
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE and LOCAL LIST soft keys.
6. Select the waypoint you want to remove.
7. Press the REMOVE WPT soft key.
Removing a waypoint from the plotter display

4. Select a route.
5. Press the EDIT ROUTE soft key.
6. Press the PLOT soft key to show the plot screen.
3-40
7. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint you want to remove from
the route.
8. Press the REMOVE WPT soft key. The route is redrawn, eliminating the waypoint
removed.
3.9.5 Erasing routes

5. Press the ERASE ROUTE soft key. You are asked if you are sure to erase the route.
6. Push the ENTER knob to erase the route, or the CLEAR key to escape.
3.10 Navigation
This section shows you how to get to a desired destination by “quick points,” waypoints,
port services and routes.
Note: Reciprocal setting and canceling of destination is available by outputting the data
sentence ZDA from the NavNet unit connected to the navigator.
3.10.1 Navigating to a “quick point”

The “quick point” feature allows you to navigate to point(s) without retaining the data
indefinitely in your unit’s memory.
Selecting quick point entry method

You need to tell your unit how to set the quick point: 1 POINT, 35 POINTS (up to 35 points)
or 35PTS/FIND. (For how to navigate to points/port services see “3.10.3 Navigating to ports,
port services” on page 3-43.)

2. Press the PLOTTER SETUP soft key.
For C-MAP, press the PLOTTER SETUP, PROTTER SETTINGS soft keys in that order.
3. Use the Cursor pad to select SET GOTO METHOD, then press the EDIT soft key.
GOTO METHOD GOTO METHOD
¤ 1 POINT ¤ 1 POINT
¡ 35 POINTS ¡ 35 POINTS
¡ 35PTS/FIND ¡ 35PTS/PORT SVC
C-MAP NavChart
Go to method window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select a method.
3-41
Navigating to a single quick point

1. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (GOTO WPT soft key appears) or a new
location (GOTO CURSOR soft key appears).
2. Select “1 POINT” following the procedure in the above paragraph.
3. Depending on the selection you made at step 1, press the GOTO CURSOR or GOTO
WPT soft key.
A solid blue line with arrows connects between own ship and destination, which is marked
as “<QP01>” for cursor-selected location or waypoint name in case of waypoint. This line
shows the shortest course to the destination. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow
to get to the quick point. Range and bearing from own ship to the destination appear at the
top of screen. The quick point location is saved to the waypoint list as waypoint “QP01.”
Navigating to multiple quick points

1. Select “35 POINTS” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry method” on
the previous page.
2. Press the GOTO soft key.
3. Place the cursor on an existing waypoint (SELECT WPT soft key appears) or a new
location (ADD QP soft key appears).
4. Depending on the action taken at step 3, press the SELECT WPT or ADD QP soft key.
“QP<01>” appears at the cursor location if a quick point is selected. To erase
last-entered quick point (waypoint), press the ERASE LST QP (ERASE LST WP) soft
key.
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to complete the route.
6. Push the ENTER knob to finish.
A solid light-blue line with arrows connects between own ship and the first point and all
other points are connected with a green dashed line with arrows. Arrows on the line show
the direction to follow to get to your destination. Quick points are numbered in sequential
order from QP<01> and are saved to the waypoint list. Range and bearing from own ship to
the first destination appear at the top of screen. The quick points are saved as a route,
under the name “Q>RTE” (Quick Route).
3.10.2 Navigating to waypoints

Selecting a waypoint from the plotter display
1. Operate the Cursor pad to select a waypoint.
2. Press the GOTO WPT soft key.
Note: GOTO method should be selected to “1 POINT” on the PLOTTER SETUP menu.
Selecting a waypoint from the waypoint list

3. Press the WAYPOINTS soft key to open the waypoint menu.
4. Press the LOCAL LIST or ALPHANUMERIC LIST soft key as desired.
5. Use the Cursor pad to select a waypoint.
3-42
6. Press the GOTO soft key, and the plotter display appears.
For either of the above methods, a solid light-blue line with arrows runs between waypoint
selected and own ship’s position. Arrows on the line show the direction to follow to get to
the waypoint. Waypoint data appears at the top of screen.
Selecting an external waypoint

You can select a waypoint (or route) entered at an external plotter connected with NMEA
cable. This function requires RMB sentence.
1. Press the MENU key, PLOTTER SETUP soft key to show the PLOTTER SETUP menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select QP.
3. Press the ENTER soft key or ENTER knob to show the QP window.
QP
¡ EXT WPT (RMB)

¤ INTERNAL
QP window
4. Select EXT WPT (RMB).
5. On a connected external plotter, set a waypoint (or route) as the destination.
Selected waypoint (route) appears on the NavNet plotter screen. (on radar screen, a lollipop
appears to show the waypoint.)
3.10.3 Navigating to ports, port services

The port service list shows services available at ports or harbors. (See page 3-12 and 17.)
You can use the list to set your destination as follows:
1. Select “35 PTS/PORT SVC” following the procedure in “Selecting quick point entry
method” on page 3-41.
This procedure is necessary for NEAR SERVICE function.
2. Place the cursor on the location desired, then press the ENTER knob to show the
OBJECT INFORMATION window.
3. Press the FIND soft key to show the FIND window.
4. Operate the Cursor pad to choose PORT LIST or PORT SERVICE, and then press the
ENTER knob or ENTER soft key to show the list.
5. Operate the Cursor pad to choose the port (service), and then press the ENTER knob
and GOTO PORT soft key in order.
3-43
SELECT SERVICE
FUEL
WATER
SELECT PORTS
OTHER UTILITIES
ON THE PIER ACCIAROLI POSITION
xx xx.xxx'N
ACQUAMORTA xxx xx.xxx'W
BRG. & RNG.

REPAIR SERVICES AGNONE S. NICOLA
xxxT x.xxxnm
AGROPOLI
GENERAL SERVICE
AMALFI XXXXXXX
GENERAL XXXXXXX
XXXXXXX
BAIA
CAPRI
FIRST AID CASA MICCIOLA-ISCHIA
OTHER INFORMATION Port list (NavChart , Italy) TM
TM
Port services (NavChart )
Port services and sample port list (Ex. NavChart)

6. (NavChart) If you selected PORT (Navionics only) at step 4, use the Cursor pad to
select a port, then press the GOTO soft key. Make a route using the soft keys, then push
the ENTER knob. (If you want to go directly to that port, simply press the ADD QP soft
key followed by the ENTER knob.)
(C-MAP) If you selected PORT LIST at step 4, use the Cursor pad to select a port, and
then press the ENTER knob or ENTER soft key. Press the CANCEL soft key several
times to close windows, and then do the follows.
a) Operate the Cursor pad to select the sailboat icon at the center of the screen.
b) Press the GO TO soft key.
c) Press QUICK ROUTE soft key.
d) Press the SELECT WPT soft key.
e) Press the ENTER knob.
If you selected SERVICE at step 4, select service mark desired with the Cursor pad
and then push the ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob. Then, the display shows the
locations of those services nearest you. Use the Cursor pad to place the “hand cursor”
on the port service icon desired, then press the ENTER soft key. Make a route using the
soft keys, then push the ENTER knob. (If you want to go directly to location selected,
simply press the ADD QP soft key followed by pushing the ENTER knob.) For C-MAP,
press the CANCEL soft key several times to show the plotter display with the port having
the selected service at the center of the display. Select the port with cursor, and then set
it as destination referring to step a) through e) shown above.
3-44
3.10.4 Following a route

Selecting the route to follow
3. Press the ROUTES soft key to open the route list.
4. Select a route.
5. Press the GOTO soft key to show the plotter display. The cursor is on the waypoint
nearest own ship.
FROM 1.3 nm GOTO
WPT FISH OS 208.5°M ROUTE
16.0 nm
WP-002
GOTO
WPT
FISH
RVRSE
WP-001 ROUTE
RETURN
CRAB
Plotter display, route selected as destination

6. Operate the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint or leg in the route from
where to start navigating the route.
7. Press the GOTO WPT or FOLLOW LEG soft key, depending on the action taken at step
A solid blue line runs between own ship and first waypoint. Green dashed lines connect all
other waypoints. The arrows on the lines show the direction to traverse the route.
Navigating waypoints in reverse order

Press the RVRSE ROUTE soft key followed by the ENTER knob to navigate waypoints in
reverse order. The arrows on the route line point in the direction selected.
3-45
Restarting navigation
When you steer to avoid an obstacle or the vessel drifts, you may go off your intended
course, as in Line 1 in the figure below. Also, if you don’t need to return to the original
course, you can go directly to the next waypoint, as in Line 2 in the figure below. In these
cases, use the restart navigation function to restart navigation.
Line 2
Line 1
Obstacle
Original course
Example of when to restart navigation

3. Press the LOG soft key.
Destination waypoint (Waypoint name in reverse video)
Passed waypoint (gray characters)
Estimated Time of Arrival at destination
LOG
ETA 23:59 11.FEB
01 34°44.111'N LEG RE-

135°21.134'W START Replaced by
001WPT
29.9° "FOLLOW LEG"
02 34°43.432'N 12.0nm
STOP
when selecting
▲
003WPT 135°41.456'W 159.9°

a route leg.
03 34°14.124'N 6.00nm
002WPT 135°21.567'W RVRSE

50.5°
Replaces triangle 29.8nm
04 34°44.569'N
when selecting a 005WPT 135°21.152'W
359.9°
route leg. SPEED
05 34°54.124'N 3.0nm
008WPT 135°21.888'W
COORD
TYPE
Log display
4. Use the Cursor pad to select a waypoint or a route leg. When a route leg is selected
the single arrow cursor is replaced by double arrows.
5. Press the RESTART soft key or FOLLOW LEG soft key in case of route leg.
RESTART: Line2 in the figure above
FOLLOW LEG: Line 1 in the figure above
3-46
Setting speed for ETA calculation

Speed, which may be input manually or automatically, is required to calculate ETA
(Estimated Time of Arrival) to a destination.

4. Press the SPEED soft key.
SPEED FOR ETA

▲
¤ SPD 010.0kt
¡ GPS AVG. SPEED
▼
Select speed for ETA window

5. Enter speed manually in the SPD field, or use GPS speed data (if applicable) by
selecting GPS AVG. SPEED.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob to register your selection.
Switching waypoints
When you arrive to a waypoint on a route, you can switch to the next waypoint by one of the
three methods below.
PERPENDICULAR: Automatically switches the destination waypoint when the boat comes
passes an imaginary perpendicular line passing through the center of the destination
waypoint or the boat comes within the arrival alarm range.
ARRVL ALM CRCL: Destination waypoint is automatically switched when the boat comes
within the arrival alarm range. For how to set the arrival alarm, see the paragraph 3.11.2
Arrival alarm.
MANUAL: The destination waypoint may be manually switched by using the RESTART soft
key. This function is operative when “1 POINT” is selected as the GOTO method.
WPT 2 WPT 2
Waypoint switched Waypoint switched

at this point. at this point.
WPT 1 WPT 1
Perpendicular Arrival Alarm Circle
Automatic waypoint switching methods
3-47
To select waypoint switching method do the following:

3. Use the Cursor pad to select WAYPOINT SWITCHING.
4. Press the EDIT soft key to show the waypoint switching window.
5. Use the Cursor pad to select appropriate waypoint switching method;
PERPENDICULAR, ARRVL ALM CRCL (default setting), or MANUAL.
3.10.5 Canceling route navigation

Through the menu
4. Press the STOP soft key.
6. Press the RELEASE soft key.
On the plotter display

1. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor on the waypoint selected as destination.
2. Press the CLEAR key.
The message “STOP GOTO?” appears.
3-48
3.11 Alarms
The plotter section has eight conditions which generate both audio and visual alarms:
arrival alarm, anchor watch alarm, XTE (Cross Track Error) alarm, proximity alarm, speed
alarm, trip alarm, water temperature alarm and bottom alarm. (The bottom and water
temperature alarms, which require depth and water temperature data, may also be set on
the sounder alarm menu. For these alarms see Chapter 4.)
You may set up the plotter alarms on the ALARM menu, which may be displayed by
pressing the ALARM key.
AUDIO ALARM ALARM1 BOTTOM ALARM ALARM2

INTERNAL BUZZ OFF
ARRIVAL ALARM TEMPERATURE ALARM
OFF 0.010nm EDIT OFF EDIT
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM
OFF 0.010nm GROUNDING ALARM*
NEXT
PROXIMITY ALARM 00.0 ft
PAGE
OFF GROUNDING ALARM RANGE*
XTE ALARM 0.050nm
CLEAR CLEAR
OFF 0.050nm ALARM ALARM
SPEED ALARM
OFF
NEXT PREV. PREV..
PAGE PAGE PAGE
TRIP ALARM
OFF 0000.0nm
RETURN
ALARM INFOMATION ALARM INFOMATION

NO ALARM NO ALARM
*C-MAP only
Page 1 Page 2
Plotter alarm menu
3.11.1 Audio alarm on/off

Audio and visual alarms are released whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can
enable or disable the audio alarm as follows:
AUDIO ALARM
1. Press the ALARM key to show the alarm menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select AUDIO ALARM.
¡ INT & EXT BUZZ
¤ INTERNAL BUZZ
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window. ¡ OFF
4. Use the Cursor pad to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal
+ External alarm), INTERNAL BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF as appropriate. This turns
on or off the audio alarm globally for all alarms, including radar.
6. Press the ALARM key to finish.
3-49
3.11.2 Arrival alarm

The arrival alarm informs you that your boat is approaching a destination waypoint. The
area that defines an arrival zone is that of a circle which you approach from the outside of
the circle. The alarm will be released if your boat enters the circle. When the arrival alarm is
active a red dashed circle marks the arrival alarm area. Note that the arrival alarm and
anchor watch alarm can be turned on together.
Alarm
range
Own ship
: Alarm area Destination

waypoint
How the arrival alarm works

1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select ARRIVAL ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the arrival alarm window.
ARRIVAL ALARM
▲
¡ ON 0.010nm
¤ OFF
▼
Arrival alarm window

4. Use the Cursor pad to select ON.
5. Use the Cursor pad and the ENTER knob to enter alarm setting: Operate the Cursor
pad to select digit; use the ENTER knob to enter value. The available arrival alarm
setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to register setting.
3-50
3.11.3 Anchor watch alarm

The anchor watch alarm informs you that your boat is moving when it should be at rest.
When the anchor watch is active, a red dashed circle with an “X” at its center marks the
anchor watch area.
Alarm
setting
Your ship's position where

you start the anchor watch : Alarm
alarm. area
How the anchor watch alarm works

2. Use the Cursor pad to select ANCHOR WATCH ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the anchor alarm window.
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM

▲
¡ ON 0.010nm
¤ OFF
▼
Anchor watch alarm window

pad to select digit; use the ENTER knob to enter value. The available anchor watch
setting is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
Note: If the arrival alarm range is changed, turn off the anchor watch alarm and then turn it
on again to give priority to the anchor watch alarm.
3-51
3.11.4 XTE (Cross-Track Error) alarm

The XTE alarm warns you when your boat is off its intended course. When the XTE alarm is
active two red dashed lines mark the XTE alarm area.
Own ship Destination

position Alarm
waypoint
setting
Intended
course
: Alarm
How the XTE alarm works

2. Use the Cursor pad to select XTE ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the XTE alarm window.
XTE ALARM
▲
¡ ON 0.050nm
¤ OFF
▼
XTE alarm window

pad to select digit; use the ENTER knob to enter value. The available XTE alarm setting
is 0.001 to 9.999 miles.
3.11.5 Speed alarm

The speed alarm warns when your boat’s speed is within or
under/over the speed range set.
SPEED ALARM
1. Press the ALARM key to open the alarm menu. ▲
¡ WITHIN
2. Use the Cursor pad to select SPEED ALARM. 000.0 ~ 000.0 kt
3. Press the EDIT soft key to display the speed alarm ¡ UNDER/OVER
window. 000.0 ~ 000.0 kt
¤ OFF
4. Use the Cursor pad to select WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, or ▼
OFF as appropriate
5. For WITHIN and UNDER/OVER use the Cursor pad and
the ENTER knob to enter alarm range: Operate the
Cursor pad to select digit; use the ENTER knob to enter value.
3-52
3.11.6 Proximity alarm

The proximity alarm alerts you when own ship nears a waypoint, which is marked with the
proximity mark, by the proximity alarm radius set for that waypoint on the waypoint list.
When own ship is within a waypoint’s proximity alarm radius, the alarm sounds. The
proximity mark remains on the screen until the waypoint is erased.
Radius in proportion to
proximity alarm radius,
which is set on waypoint list
001WPT
Proximity mark

2. Use the Cursor pad to select PROXIMITY ALARM.
PROXIMITY ALARM
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the proximity alarm
▲
window. ¡ ON
4. Use the Cursor pad to select ON or OFF as ¤ OFF
▼
appropriate, then press the ENTER soft key.
5. Press the ALARM key to finish. Proximity alarm window
3.11.7 Trip alarm

The trip alarm informs you when you have traveled a certain distance.

2. Use the Cursor pad to select TRIP ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the trip alarm window.
4. Select ON. TRIP ALARM
5. Use the Cursor pad and the ENTER knob to enter alarm ▲
setting: Operate the Cursor pad to select digit; use the ¡ ON 0000.0nm
¤ OFF
ENTER knob to enter value. ▼
6. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER knob to
register setting. Trip alarm window
3-53
3.11.8 Grounding alarm (C-MAP specification)

The grounding alarm feature continuously scans the electronic chart data in front of the boat
to detect charted rocks, shoals, obstructions and land areas that could pose a threat if the
vessel were to continue along its current course. The area searched is user-definable and is
identified by a red triangle on the screen.
Note: This function only checks objects that appear on the chart and is therefore limited by
the accuracy of the original source material from which the electronic charts where
produced.

2. Choose GROUNDING ALARM from page 2 of the ALARM menu.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the grounding alarm window.
GROUNDING ALARM
▲
{ ON 0.500 ft
~ OFF
▼
Grounding alarm window

4. Select ON.
5. Use the Trackball and the alphanumeric keys to enter depth setting: Operate the
Trackball to set depth. Set shallow depth for shallow waters.
7. Choose GROUNDING ALARM RANGE and push the ENTER knob.
GROUNDING ALARM RANGE
0.250 nm
8. Use the Trackball and alphanumeric keys to enter alarm range, that is, how far ahead
to look for possible grounding situations.
3-54
3.11.9 Alarm information

When an alarm setting has been violated, the buzzer sounds and the speaker icon appears
and is red. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm. You can see which alarm has been
violated on the ALARM menu. In the example below the arrival alarm has been violated.
1. Press the ALARM key. The name of the offending alarm appears in the alarm
information window.
AUDIO ALARM ALARM1

INT & EXT BUZZ
ARRIVAL ALARM
ON 0.010nm EDIT
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM
OFF 0.010nm
NEXT
PROXIMITY ALARM INFO
OFF
XTE ALARM
CLEAR
OFF 0.050nm ALARM
SPEED ALARM
OFF
NEXT
PAGE
TRIP ALARM
OFF 0000.0nm
RETURN
ALARM INFOMATION
Alarm information ARRIVED
window AT WAYPOINT.
CONTINUE
Speaker icon
Means multiple alarms

have been violated.
Plotter alarm menu, page 1

2. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the buzzer if
it was not done with the CLEAR key). The color of the speaker icon changes from red to
background color. The icon remains on the screen until the cause of the alarm is
eliminated or the alarm is disabled. If more than one alarm has been violated the
message CONTINUE appears at the bottom of the alarm information window. In this
case, press the NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have been violated.
Note: The alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to background
color when the CLEAR key or CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed. The color does not
change regardless of how many other alarms are violated.
3-55
Alarm messages
The table below shows the plotter alarm messages and their meanings.
Plotter alarm messages and their meanings.
Message Meaning
ARRIVED AT WAYPOINT XXX! (XXX = waypoint name) Arrival alarm violated.
ENTERED INTO AVOIDANCE AREA! Proximity alarm violated.
EXCEEDED ANCHOR WATCH LIMIT! Anchor watch alarm violated.
EXCEEDED XTE LIMIT! XTE alarm violated.
SPEED ALARM! Speed alarm violated.
TEMPERATURE ALARM! Water temperature alarm violated.
TRIP ALARM! MILEAGE EXCEEDED Trip alarm violated.
Grounding alarm (C=MAP
GROUNDING ALARM specification) violated. See next
paragraph.
Depth area (C=MAP specification)

GUARDIAN ALARM (DEPTH AREA)
violated. See next paragraph.
Land area (C=MAP specification)
GUARDIAN ALARM (LAND AREA)
Intertidal area (C=MAP specification)
GUARDIAN ALARM (INTERTIDAL AREA)
Rock alarm (C=MAP specification)
GUARDIAN ALARM (ROCK)
Shoreline construct (C=MAP
GUARDIAN ALARM (SHORELINE CONSTRUCT) specification) violated. See next
paragraph.
Obstruction (C=MAP specification)
GUARDIAN ALARM (OBSTRUCTION)
No data alarm (C=MAP specification)
GUARDIAN ALARM (NO DATA AVAILABLE)
3-56
3.12 Resetting Trip Distance

Trip distance is shown on the navigation data display. You can reset the trip distance to
zero as follows:

2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and GENERAL SETUP soft keys in that order to
show the GENERAL SETUP menu.
GENERAL
KEY BEEP SETUP1
▲
ON
LANGUAGE
ENGLISH EDIT
RANGE UNIT
nm, kt
TEMPERATURE UNIT
F
DEPTH UNIT
ft NEXT
WIND UNIT PAGE
kt
WIND DATA
APPARENT
SPEED AVERAGING RETURN
0060 second (s)
LOCAL TIME OFFSET
+00:00
RESET TRIP LOG
NO
TIMEOUT DISPLAY SETTING
15sec
SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION
SAVE SHIP
POSITION & MOB
WALLPAPER
DEFAULT
General setup menu, page 1

Note: AIS OPTION soft key is currently inoperative.
3. Use the Cursor pad to select RESET TRIP LOG, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Use the Cursor pad to select YES, then press the ENTER soft key.
3-57
3-58
4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION
With connection of the optional Network Sounder ETR-6/10N/30N you can show video
sounder images on the display.
4.1 Sounder Displays

4.1.1 Selecting a sounder display
There are seven display modes from which to choose: dual frequency, single frequency,
marker zoom, bottom zoom, bottom lock, bottom discrimination, and A-scope.
To select a display;
1. Press the DISP key and then select sounder display desired.
2. If not already displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.
3. Press the DISPLY MODE soft key to show the display mode window.
DISPLAY MODE
¤ DUAL FREQ
¡ SINGLE FREQ
¡ MARKER ZOOM
¡ BOTTOM ZOOM
¡ BOTTOM LOCK
¡ BOTTOM DSCRM
HF: 200.0 kHz
LF: 50.0 kHz
Display mode window

4. Use the Cursor pad or the ENTER knob to select a display.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to close the window.
Note: On menus which show the RETURN soft key you may use it or the ENTER knob to
register setting and close the window.
4-1
4.1.2 Description of sounder displays

Single-frequency display
Display mode
Variable Range Marker (white)
Depth scale
Minute marker Time Soft keys
Zero line 0'30" 0 SOUNDER

SINGLE
Icons S
I
M
(alarm, battery,
simulation) F SHIFT
50
52 50
Color bar Fish AUTO/
D. BOX
40
echo Cross-hair
Temp. cursor
FREQ
scale 30 100 LF /HF
(orange)
DISPLY
Water MODE
temp.
graph 150
Water
temp. 114
display LF 200
Tx frequency Bottom echo
Depth
Indications on the single frequency display

Note: The water temperature display requires an appropriate water temperature sensor. It
can be turned on or off with TEMPERATURE GRAPH on the SOUNDER MENU.
Selecting transmission frequency

The single frequency display shows either the LF (low frequency) picture or HF (high
frequency) picture. To select transmission frequency, press the FREQ LF/HF soft key. “LF”
or “HF” is highlighted on its key label with each press of the key.
0.0
Dual-frequency display
The dual-frequency display provides both
LF and HF pictures. This display is useful
for comparing the same picture with two
different sounding frequencies.
LF picture
The sounder uses ultrasonic pulses to LF HF
detect bottom conditions. The lower the

frequency of the pulse, the wider the Dual-frequency display
detection area. Therefore, the low
4-2
frequency is useful for general detection and judging bottom condition.

HF picture
The higher the frequency of the ultrasonic pulse the better the resolution. Therefore, the
high frequency is ideal for detailed observation of fish school.
low frequency
high frequency
Sounding area and transmission frequency
Marker-zoom display
The marker-zoom display expands a selected area of the normal sounder picture to full
vertical size of the screen on the left-half window. You may specify the portion to expand by
operating the VRM (Variable Range Marker), which you can shift with the ENTER knob.
The area between the VRM and zoom marker is expanded. The length of the segment is
equal to one division of the depth scale.
Note: The VRM is set independently from other displays in case of multiple displays.
Fish school
- 0'20"
0
42
-
-
Fish
- school
44
- VRM
- 42.0
50
- (White on color model)
-
46
This part
-
- is zoomed.
48
-
50
-
-
-
100
-
80 HF
- Zoom marker
MARKER-ZOOM NORMAL
DISPLAY DISPLAY
Marker-zoom display plus normal sounder display
4-3
Bottom-zoom display
The bottom-zoom display expands bottom and bottom fish echoes by the zoom range
selected on the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP menu (see paragraph 7.9.3), and is useful for
determining bottom hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is
a soft, sandy bottom. A long echo tail means a hard bottom.
- 0
0
-- -
20.0
-
-- -
10 -
-- 50
-
-
Zoom marker
--
Bottom
-
-
20
--
-- 100
-
80 30 HF -
BOTTOM-ZOOM NORMAL DISPLAY
DISPLAY
Bottom-zoom display plus normal sounder display

Bottom-lock display
The bottom-lock display provides a compressed normal picture on the right half of the
screen and a 10 or 20 feet (3 or 6 meter) wide layer in contact with the bottom is expanded
onto the left half of the screen. This mode is useful for discriminating bottom fish from the
bottom echo. You may select the bottom lock range from the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP
menu. For details, see paragraph 7.9.3.
10 0
--
- -
8 -
Fish --
-
-
-
school
6 Zoom marker
-- 50
- -
4
-- -
- - This part
is zoomed.
102 -- -
80 - 100
-
0 HF
-
BOTTOM-LOCK NORMAL DISPLAY
DISPLAY
Bottom-lock display plus normal sounder display
4-4
Bottom discrimination display

The bottom discrimination mode displays the bottom echo to help you determine bottom
hardness. A bottom displayed with a short echo tail usually means it is a soft, sandy bottom.
A long echo tail means a hard bottom.
- 0
4
- -
- 20.0
-
-
- -
2
- - Zoom marker
- 50
Bottom tail -
0
Long tail = Hard bottom
Short tail = Soft bottom
-
-
-
-
-
100
50
80 - HF -
BOTTOM NORMAL DISPLAY
DISCRIMINATION
DISPLAY
Bottom discrimination display
A-scope display (display only)

The A-scope display, available in all modes, shows echoes at each transmission with
amplitudes and tone proportional to their intensities, on the right 1/10 of the screen. It is
useful for estimating fish species and bottom composition. To turn on the A-scope display,
press the DISPLAY MODE soft key, select display mode desired, then press the A-SCPE
soft key to show “ON” on its label. For modes other than SINGLE FREQ the screen must be
split horizontally to show the A-scope display.
0
-
-
-
50
- A-scope display
No response
- Weak echo (fish)
-
-
100 - Strong echo (bottom)
84 -
HF
-
SINGLE FREQ DISPLAY A-SCOPE
DISPLAY
A-scope display
4-5
4.1.3 Selecting screen split method in combination displays

On combination sounder displays you can split the screen vertically or
horizontally, using the SPLIT soft key as below.
0.0 0.0
SPLIT
/
HF
SPLIT
/
LF HF LF
How to use the SPLIT soft key (example: dual frequency display)
4.2 Automatic Sounder Operation

Automatic sounder operation is useful when you are preoccupied with other tasks and do
not have the time to adjust the display.
4.2.1 How the automatic sounder works

The automatic sounder function automatically selects the proper gain, range scale and
clutter suppression level according to the depth. It works as follows:
The range changes automatically to locate the bottom on the lower half of the screen. The
range jumps to one step shallower range when the bottom echoes reach a half way point
of the full scale from the top and to one step deeper range when they come to the lower
edge of the scale.
The gain is automatically adjusted to display the bottom echo in reddish brown (default
color arrangement).
Clutter, which suppresses low level noise, is automatically adjusted.
4.2.2 Types of automatic sounder modes

Two types of automatic sounder modes are available: CRUISING and FISHING. CRUISING
is for tracking the bottom, and FISHING is for searching fish schools. CRUISING uses a
higher clutter rejection setting than FISHING therefore it is not recommended for fish
detection - weak fish echoes may be erased by the clutter suppression circuit.
4-6
4.2.3 How to enable automatic sounder operation

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.
2. Press the AUTO/D. BOX soft key.
AUTO MODE
▲
¤ CRUISING
¡ FISHING
¡ OFF (MANUAL)
▼
Mode/frequency window
3. Use the Cursor pad or the ENTER knob to select CRUISING or FISHING as
appropriate.
4.3 Manual Sounder Operation

Manual operation is useful for observing fish schools and bottom using a fixed gain setting.
The gain, range and range shift functions used together give you the means to select the
depth you can see on the screen. The basic range can be thought of as providing a
“window” into the water column and range shifting as moving the “window” to the desired
depth.
4.3.1 Selecting the manual mode

1. If not displayed, press the HIDE/SHOW key to show the sounder soft keys.
2. Press the AUTO/D. BOX soft key to show the mode/frequency window.
3. Select OFF (MANUAL).
4.3.2 Selecting display range

Press the [RANGE +] or [RANGE -] key to select a range. The default ranges in feet, meters,
fathoms and passi/braza are as below. Note that the range cannot be changed in the
automatic sounder mode.
Default sounder ranges
Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 Range 6 Range 7 Range 8
ETR-6/10N ETR-30N
15 ft 30 ft 60 ft 120 ft 200 ft 400 ft 1000 ft 4000 ft 4500 ft
5m 10 m 20 m 40 m 80 m 150 m 300 m 1200 m 1500 m
3 fa 5 fa 10 fa 20 fa 40 fa 80 fa 150 fa 650 fa 900 fa
3 P/B 5 P/B 10 P/B 30 P/B 50 P/B 100 P/B 200 P/B 700 P/B 900 P/B
4-7
4.3.3 Adjusting the gain

Normally, set the gain to the point where excessive noise does not appear on the screen.
Use a higher gain setting for greater depths and a lower setting for shallow waters.
Gain too high Gain proper Gain too low
Examples of proper and improper gain

Press the GAIN key to show the gain window, and adjust the ENTER knob or Cursor pad.
Current level is shown on the bar, and the setting range is 0-100(%). Press the RETURN
soft key to finish.
GAIN - LF
▲ 57
HIGH
LOW
▼
Gain window
Note 1: On the dual-frequency display, the gain can be independently set for LF and HF.
Use the FREQ LF/HF soft key to select the frequency for which to adjust gain.
Note 2: Gain cannot be adjusted in the automatic sounder mode. The message
“SOUNDER GAIN CANNOT BE CHANGED IN AUTO MODE” is displayed when you
attempt to do so.
4.3.4 Shifting the range

The basic range may be shifted up or down as desired by pressing the SHIFT soft key
followed by adjusting the ENTER knob. Press the RETURN soft key to finish.
Shift
Shift concept
4-8
4.4 Measuring Depth, Time

The VRM measures the depth and the cross-hair cursor, time.
1. Rotate the ENTER knob to shift the VRM; counterclockwise to shift it downward,
clockwise to shift it upward. You may also use the Cursor pad to shift the VRM.
2. Roll the Cursor pad horizontally to adjust the cross-hair cursor to measure time.
Depth to VRM
Time for a scan line to travel

from the right edge of the
display to the cross-hair cursor
0'33" 0
VRM (white)
40.0
50
Cross-hair
cursor
100
150
97 200
LF
How to measure depth and time
Note: If, when the range setting is over 1000 ft (m, fa, p/b), the VRM indication and depth
scale may overlap one another, shift the cross-hair cursor slightly to show them completely.
Further, when the display is shifted, the depth scale may obscure the time indication.
4.5 Reducing Interference

Interference from other acoustic equipment operating nearby or other electronic equipment
on your boat may show itself on the display as shown below.
Interference from Electrical inteference

other sounder
Types of interference
To reduce interference, do the following:
4-9

2. Press the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
3. Select NOISE LIMITER, then press the EDIT soft key to show the noise limiter window.
NOISE LIMITER
▲
¤ OFF
¡ LOW
¡ MEDIUM
¡ HIGH
▼
Noise limiter window

4. Use the Cursor pad to select the degree of suppression desired (LOW, MEDIUM,
HIGH), or turn the noise limiter off.
Turn the noise limiter circuit off when no interference exists, otherwise weak echoes may be
missed.
4.6 Reducing Low Level Noise

Light-blue dots may appear over most of the screen. This is mainly due to sediment in the
water, or noise. This noise can be suppressed by adjusting CLUTTER on the SOUNDER
menu.
Appearance of clutter
When the automatic sounder mode is used, clutter is automatically adjusted. To reduce low
level noise in manual sounder operation do the following:

3. Select CLUTTER, then press the EDIT soft key to show the clutter window.
CLUTTER
▲
09
▼
Clutter window
4. Adjust the Cursor pad upward or downward to select clutter rejection level desired; 0
4-10
(OFF) through 16. The higher the number the higher the degree of suppression. Note
that the clutter suppressor may erase weak echoes. Therefore, turn off the clutter when
its use is not required.
Note: Unlike the signal level feature, clutter does not reduce display colors. However, if you
do not wish to change the relation between weak and strong echoes, use signal level
instead.
4.7 Erasing Weak Echoes

Sediments in the water or reflections from plankton may be painted on the display in green
or light blue. These weak echoes may be erased as below.
Weak
echoes
Appearance of weak echoes

3. Select SIGNAL LEVEL, and press the EDIT soft key to show the signal level window.
SIGNAL LEVEL
▲
¤ OFF
¡ SL1 SIGNAL LEVEL
¡ SL2 ▲
¡ SL3 ¤ OFF
¡ SL4 ¡ SL1
¡ SL5 ¡ SL2
¡ SL6 ¡ SL3
▼ ▼
16-color display 8-color display
Signal level window

4. Use the Cursor pad to select level of erasure or OFF as appropriate. The higher the
number the stronger the echo that will be erased.
Note: Unlike “clutter,” signal level reduces display colors. Therefore, if you do not wish to
reduce colors, use clutter instead.
4-11
4.8 White Marker

The white marker functions to display a particular echo color in white. For example, you
may want to display the bottom echo in white to discriminate fish echoes near the bottom.

3. Select WHITE MARKER, then press the EDIT soft key to open the white marker
window.
WHITE MARKER
▲
OFF
▼
White marker window

4. Use the Cursor pad to select the color to display in white. As you use the Cursor pad,
the number in the white marker window changes, the white marker on the echo strength
bar shifts and the selected echo color is displayed in white.
White marker shows

← color currently
displayed in white.
Color bar (16 color) when white marker function is active

To turn the white marker function off, display “OFF” in the white marker window.
4.9 Picture Advance Speed

The picture advance speed determines how quickly the vertical scan lines run across the
screen. When selecting a picture advance speed, keep in mind that a fast advance speed
will expand the size of the fish school horizontally on the screen and a slow advance speed
will contract it.
The advancement speed may be set independent of or synchronized with ship’s speed.
4.9.1 Advancement independent of ship’s speed

3. Select PICTURE ADVANCE, and press the EDIT soft key to open the picture advance
window.
4-12
PICTURE ADVANCE
▲
¤ 2/1
¡ 1/1
¡ 1/2
¡ 1/4
¡ 1/8
¡ 1/16
¡ STOP
▼
Picture advance window

4. Use the Cursor pad to select speed desired. The fractions in the window denote the
number of scan lines produced per transmission. For example, 1/8 means one scan line
is produced every eight transmissions. STOP freezes the display and it is convenient for
observing an echo.
Note: When using the plotter/sounder combination display, advancement of the sounder
picture may be temporarily interrupted while the plotter display is being shifted or its display
range is being changed.
4.9.2 Advancement synchronized with ship’s speed

With speed data provided by a speed-measuring device, picture advance speed may be set
according to ship’s speed, the ship’s speed dependent mode. As shown in the figure below
the horizontal scale of the display is not influenced by the change of ship’s speed, thus the
speed-dependent picture advance permits judgment of fish school size and abundance at
any speed. The choice “SPD SENSING PRR” means the ship’s speed dependent mode,
where the PRR changes automatically with ship’s speed.
Fish school shrinks as speed
is increased; expanded
as speed is decreased.
Same size Normal Mode

fish schools
FULL HALF
SPEED SPEED Fish schools are shown
Speed same size regardless
Actual Movement of ship’s speed.
Speed-Dependent Picture Advance Mode
How the speed-dependent picture advance mode works
4-13
Activating/deactivating the speed-dependent picture advance mode

1. Press the MENU key followed by the SOUNDER MENU soft key.
2. Select PRR LEVEL.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to open the setting window.
4. Use the Cursor pad to select SPD SENSING PRR.
Note: Use the same speed data sentence (STG or STW) throughout the network for
smooth advancement of the sounder picture. See the paragraph 6.5 for how to output data
through the network.
4.10 Display Colors

You can select the number of colors and background color to display as follows:

3. Select HUE, then press the EDIT soft key to show the hue window.
HUE
▲
1
▼
Hue window
4. Use the Cursor pad to select hue number, referring to the table below. (You can see
the result of your selection on the display.)
Hue no. and background and echo colors
Hue No. Echo Color Background Color

1 16 color Blue
2 8 color Blue
3 16 color Dark blue
4 8 color Dark blue
5 16 color White
6 8 color White
7 16 color Black
8 8 color Black
9 Monochrome yellow, eight intensities
4-14
4.11 Alarms
The sounder section has five conditions which generate audio and visual alarms: bottom
alarm, fish alarm (bottom lock), fish alarm (normal) and water temperature alarm
(temperature sensor required).
You may set up the sounder alarms on the SOUNDER ALARM menu, which may be
displayed by pressing the ALARM key.
SOUNDER
AUDIO ALARM
ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
BOTTOM ALARM
OFF EDIT
TEMPERATURE ALARM
OFF
FISH ALARM
OFF CLEAR
ALARM
FISH ALARM (B/L)
OFF
RETURN
ALARM INFOMATION
NO ALARM
Sounder alarm menu
4.11.1 Audio alarm on/off

The audio alarm sounds whenever an alarm setting is violated. You can enable or disable
the audio alarm as follows:

2. Use the Cursor pad to select ALARM AUDIO.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the audio alarm window.
AUDIO ALARM
¡ INT & EXT BUZZ

¤ INTERNAL BUZZ
¡ OFF
Alarm audio window

4. Use the Cursor pad to select INT & EXT BUZZ (Internal + External alarm), INTERNAL
BUZZ (Internal alarm) or OFF. External buzzer required to select “INT+EXT BUZZ.” OFF
globally turns the audio alarm on or off for all modes, including radar.
6. Press the ALARM key to close the menu.
4-15
4.11.2 Bottom alarm

The bottom alarm sounds when the bottom echo is within the alarm range set. To activate
the bottom alarm, the depth must be displayed. Note that the bottom alarm is turned on or
off reciprocally with the bottom alarm on the plotter alarm menu.

2. Use the Cursor pad to select BOTTOM ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the bottom alarm window.
BOTTOM ALARM
▲
¡ ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
¤ OFF
▼
Bottom alarm window

4. Use the Cursor pad to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, enter alarm range
with the Cursor pad and numeric keys: Adjust the Cursor pad to select digit; hit
appropriate numeric key to enter value.
4.11.3 Fish alarm

The fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within the preset alarm range. Note that the
sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP menu.

2. Use the Cursor pad to select FISH ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm window.
FISH ALARM
▲
¡ ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
¤ OFF
▼
Fish alarm window

4. Use the Cursor pad to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the Cursor pad
and numeric keys to enter range: Adjust the Cursor pad to select digit; hit the
appropriate numeric key to enter value.
4-16
4.11.4 Fish alarm (B/L)

The bottom-lock fish alarm sounds when a fish echo is within a predetermined distance
from the bottom. Note that the sensitivity of the fish alarm can be set on the SOUNDER
SYSTEM SETUP menu.

2. Use the Cursor pad to select FISH ALARM (B/L).
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the fish alarm (B/L) window.
FISH ALARM (B/L)

▲
¡ ON
0000.0-0000.0 ft
¤ OFF
▼
Fish alarm (B/L) window

4. Use the Cursor pad to select ON or OFF as appropriate. For ON, use the Cursor pad
and numeric keys to enter range: Adjust the Cursor pad to select digit; hit appropriate
numeric key to enter value.
4.11.5 Water temperature alarm

There are two types of water temperature alarms: WITHIN RANGE and OUT OF RANGE.
The WITHIN RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is within the range set, and
the OUT OF RANGE alarm sounds when the water temperature is higher or lower than the
range set. Note that the water temperature alarm is turned on or off reciprocally with the
water temperature alarm on the plotter menu.

2. Use the Cursor pad to select TEMPERATURE ALARM.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the temperature alarm window.
TEMPERATURE ALARM
▲
¡ WITHIN RANGE
+000.0 - +000.0°F
¡ OUT OF RANGE
+000.0 - +000.0°F
¤ OFF
▼
Water temperature alarm window

4. Use the Cursor pad to select WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE or OFF as numeric
key to enter alarm range: Adjust the Cursor pad to select digit; hit appropriate numeric
key to enter value. To switch between plus and minus and vice versa use the +< - ->-
soft key.
4-17
4.11.6 When an alarm setting is violated...

When an alarm setting has been violated the buzzer sounds and the speaker icon appears
in red. Press the CLEAR key to silence the alarm. At this time the color of the speaker icon
changes from red to background color. You can see which alarm has been violated on the
alarm menu display. In the example below the bottom alarm has been violated.
To see which alarm(s) has been violated:
1. Press the ALARM key. The name of the offending alarm is shown in the ALARM
INFORMATION window.
SOUNDER
AUDIO ALARM
ALARM
INTERNAL BUZZ
BOTTOM ALARM
OFF EDIT
TEMPERATURE ALARM
OFF
FISH ALARM
0020.0-0030.0ft CLEAR
ALARM
FISH ALARM (B/L)
OFF
RETURN
Alarm information ALARM INFOMATION

window FISH ALARM!
Speaker icon
Sounder alarm menu

2. Press the CLEAR ALARM soft key to acknowledge the alarm (and silence the buzzer if
it has not already been done with the CLEAR key). The color of the speaker icon
changes from red to background color. The icon remains on the screen until the reason
for the alarm is eliminated or the alarm is disabled. If more than one alarm has been
violated, the message CONTINUE appears at the bottom of the alarm information
window. In this case, press the NEXT INFO soft key to see which other alarms have
been violated.
Note: The alarm icon is red when an alarm setting is violated, and changes to
background color when the CLEAR key or CLEAR ALARM soft key is pressed. The
color remains the same regardless of how many times another alarm is violated.
4-18
Alarm messages
The table below shows the sounder alarm messages and their meanings.
Sounder alarm messages and their meanings
Message Meaning
DEPTH ALARM! Bottom alarm violated.
FISH ALARM! Fish alarm violated.
TEMPERATURE ALARM! Water temperature alarm violated.
4.12 Water Temperature Graph

The water temperature graph (appropriate sensor required) plots water temperature on the
sounder display. (See the figure on page 4-2.) It can be turned on or off as below.

3. Select TEMPERATURE GRAPH and press the EDIT soft key.
4. Select OFF (default setting) or ON as appropriate.
4.13 Changing Pulse Repetition Rate

Pulse repetition rate can be changed. Normally, the highest rate (20) is used. When in
shallow waters, second reflection echoes may appear between surface and actual bottom
echo. In this case lower the PRR level. The option “SPD SENSING PRR” means the ship’s
speed dependent mode, where the PRR changes automatically with ship’s speed (required
speed input.) For further information about the ship’s speed dependent mode, see page
4-13.

3. Select PRR LEVEL.
4. Press the EDIT soft key to open the setting window.
5. Use the Cursor pad to select the rate for repetition.
6. Press the ENTER soft key followed by the MENU key to close the menu.
Too small setting reduces the number of pulse repetition. This may cause a problem to
search fish schools. Select “20” unless multistage reflections appear on the display.
4-19
4.14 Saving Sounder Picture to an SD Card

You may save the current sounder picture to an SD card, using a function key programmed
to save the sounder picture.
1. Program a function key in order to save the sounder picture. See paragraph 7.9.4 for the
procedure.
2. Hit the SHOW/HIDE key to show the function keys if they are not currently shown.
3. Press the function key programmed to save the sounder picture.
The sounder picture stops advancing and the message “NOW SAVING SOUNDER
PICTURE TO CARD” appears on the display while the picture is being saved. If no card is
inserted, the message “PLEASE INSERT THE CARD. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO
CONTINUE.” appears. If there is not sufficient memory remaining in the card the message
“THERE IS NO MEMORY TO SAVE PICTURE. PUSH ANY KEY TO CONTINUE.” appears.
After the picture has been recorded, normal sounder operation is restored.
4.15 Interpreting the Sounder Display

4.15.1 Zero line
The zero line (sometimes referred to as the transmission line) represents the transducer’s
position, and moves off the screen when a deep phased range is used.
Zero line
Shift
Zero line
4-20
4.15.2 Bottom echo

Echoes from the bottom are normally the strongest and are displayed in reddish-brown, but
the color and width will vary with bottom composition, water depth, frequency, sensitivity,
etc.
In a comparatively shallow depth, a high gain setting will cause a second or sometimes a
third or a fourth echo to be displayed at the same interval between them below the first
echo trace. This is because the echo travels between the bottom and the surface twice or
more in shallow depths.
The color of the bottom echo can be used to help determine the density of the bottom
materials (soft or hard). The harder the bottom, the wider the trace. If the gain is set to show
only a single bottom echo on mud, a rocky bottom will show a second or third bottom return.
The range should be chosen so the first and second bottom echoes are displayed when
bottom hardness is being determined.
Intensity difference Rock base

in water depth
Mud and sand
Second bottom
echo
Bottom echoes
4-21
4.15.3 Fish school echoes

Fish school echoes will generally be plotted between the zero line and the bottom. Usually
the fish school/fish echo is weaker than the bottom echo because its reflection property is
much smaller compared to the bottom. The size of the fish school can be ascertained from
the density of the display.
Small Large
school school
Size of
fish school
Fish school echoes
4.15.4 Surface noise/Aeration

When the waters are rough or the boat passes over a wake, surface noise may appear near
the zero line. As surface turbulence is acoustically equivalent to running into a brick wall,
the bottom echo will be displayed intermittently. Similar noise sometimes appears when a
water temperature difference (thermocline) exists. Different species of fish tend to prefer
different temperature zones, so the thermocline may be useful to help identify target fish.
200 kHz tends to show shallow thermoclines better than 50 kHz.
In rough waters the display is occasionally interrupted due to below-the-ship air bubbles
obstructing the sound path. This also occurs when the boat makes a quick turn or reverses
movement. Lowering the picture advance speed may reduce the interruption. However,
reconsideration of the transducer installation may be necessary if the interruption occurs
frequently.
Surface noise
Caused by aerated
water
Thermocline
Surface noise/aeration
4-22
5. AIS OPERATION
Connected to an AIS Interface, your NavNet unit can show the name, position and other
nav data of AIS transponder equipped ships.
5.1 Turning AIS Feature On/Off

2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION soft key.
3. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key.
4. Press the AIS OPTION soft key to show the AIS OPTION menu. (The AIS OPTION soft
key is shown in grey unless the AIS Interface Unit or FURUNO FA-150 AIS Transponder
is connected.)
AIS
AIS DISPLAY MODE OPTION
OFF
THE NUMBER OF AIS TARGET EDIT
100
PROXIMITY ALARM
OFF
CPA
OFF
TCPA
OFF RETURN
VECTOR TIME
30 minutes
VECTOR MODE
TRUE
HISTORY INTERVAL
30 seconds
AIS OPTION menu

5. Choose AIS DISPLAY MODE and press the EDIT soft key.
5-1
5. AIS OPERATION
AIS DISPLAY MODE

▲
~ RANGE 1.0 nm
{ SECTOR
{ CPA
{ TCPA
{ OFF
▼
AIS DISPLAY MODE window

6. Choose desired option from the following and push the EDIT soft key.
RANGE: Choose to use the AIS function within the range you specify. Use the numeric
keys to enter the range from own ship and then go to step 8.
SECTOR: Set an area from which to receive AIS data. Go to step 7.
CPA: Displays targets according to their CPA, from nearest to furthest.
TCPA: Displays targets according to their TCPA, from nearest to furthest.
OFF: Choose to turn off the AIS function, and then press the ENTER soft key.
7. If you chose SECTOR, do the following to set the area to use.
Choose the radar display if it is not already displayed. Head-up mode is chosen
automatically.
a) Rotate the ENTER knob to set the left side of the sector and push the ENTER knob.
b) Rotate the ENTER knob to set the right side of the sector and push the ENTER knob.
Note 1: For the OFF setting, all AIS symbols are erased from the screen, however AIS
functions continue internally.
Note 2: AIS symbols are momentarily erased after the screen is redrawn when bow
direction is changed in the Head-up mode.
Note 3: AIS is automatically turned off under any of the conditions noted below.
a) EPFS (Electric Position Fixing System) or gyro alarm generated.
b) Manual ship’s position is used.
c) DTM (Datum reference) sentence with no WGS-84 is received.
Note 4: In case of multiple display units connected via the NavNet network, the AIS feature
can only be turned on or off from the display unit to which the AIS transponder is connected.
Vector mode
You may reference the vector to North (True, requires heading and speed data) or ship’s
heading (Relative) as desired on the AIS option menu.
5-2
5. AIS OPERATION
5.2 AIS Symbols

When RANGE or SECTOR is selected, AIS-equipped ships are marked on the display at
their current position with the appropriate AIS symbol as shown below.
AIS symbols
Symbol Description
Activated automatically or manually. The dashed line shows ship’s
SOG and COG (or STW and CTW). The solid shows target bearing.
Activated target
A target whose CPA and TCPA are within the CPA and TCPA values
set by the operator.
Dangerous
target
A target is declared a lost target when no data is received for three to
five reporting intervals. When this occurs, the target is marked with the
(flashing) lost target symbol.
Lost target
Target selected on radar display. (Dashed square does not appear

when target is selected on plotter display.)
Target selected
for data display
5.3 Setting Number of AIS Targets to Display

Up to 100 of the closest AIS targets may be displayed on the screen. If you do not require
all targets you choose the number of targets to display, from 1-100.

4. Press the AIS OPTION soft key to show the AIS OPTION menu.
5. Choose THE NUMBER OF AIS TARGET and press the EDIT soft key.
6. Enter the number of AIS targets you wish to display and press the ENTER soft key.
5-3
5. AIS OPERATION
5.4 Activating Targets

Use the trackball to place the cursor on the sleeping AIS target (indicates only the presence
of a vessel equipped with AIS in a certain location) you wish to activate; that is, know more
about a vessel’s motion.
SOG and
COG vector
*1 Turning
direction
Heading
line*2
Activated target
*1: Vector shows STW (speed thru water) and CSE (course) when water tracking mode is
selected at the radar.
*2: If there is no heading data, the line points in direction of COG.
5.5 Displaying Target Data

Plotter display: Place the cursor on an AIS target symbol.
Radar display: Place the cursor on an AIS target symbol. Press the TARGET soft key then
the TARGET INFO soft key.
Activated target selected for data display (radar display only)

MMSI No. MMSI 123456789
Ship's Name NAME QUEEN ELIZABETH
Course over Ground*, Speed over Ground# COG 359° SOG 23.2kt
CPA and TCPA CPA 2nm TCPA 12:35
Bearing, Range BRG 359.4 RNG 10.8nm
Beam, Length BEAM 32m LENGTH 294m
* = CSE (course) when water tracking mode is selected at radar.

# = STW (speed thru water) when water tracking mode is selected at radar.
AIS target data display
5-4
5. AIS OPERATION
5.6 Lost Target

A target is declared a lost target when no data is received for three to five reporting intervals.
When this occurs, the target is marked with the (flashing) lost target symbol. However, the
target which becomes a lost target is a activated target or a sleeping target within the lost
target range.
Lost target
Confirming a lost target

1. Use the trackball to place the cursor where there is no ARPA target, marks or lines.
5.7 Setting CPA and TCPA

When the predicted CPA of any target becomes smaller than a preset CPA alarm range or
its predicted TCPA less than a preset TCPA alarm limit, an audio alarm sounds, the
messages CPA ALARM and TCPA ALARM appear, and the speaker icon appears (in red).
In addition, the AIS target plot symbol of the offending target changes to a triangle and
flashes together with its vector. You may silence the audio alarm with the CLEAR key.
Press the ALARM key and the message “COLLISION ALARM” appears. Press the CLEAR
soft key to acknowledge the alarm. The flashing of the triangle plot symbol continues until
you intentionally terminate tracking of the target. The ARP continuously monitors the
predicted range at the Closest Point of Approach (CPA) and predicted time to CPA (TCPA)
of each track to own ship.
This feature helps alert you to targets which may be on a collision course with own ship.
However, it is important that gain, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN and other radar controls are properly
adjusted and the ARP is set up so that it can track targets effectively.
CPA/TCPA alarm ranges must be set up properly taking into consideration the size,
tonnage, speed, turning performance and other characteristics of own ship.
Follow the steps shown below to set the CPA/TCPA alarm range:

5. Choose CPA and then press the EDIT soft key to show the CPA window.
5-5
5. AIS OPERATION
CPA
▲
~ OFF
{ 0.5nm
{ 1nm
{ 2nm
{ 3nm
{ 5nm
{ 6nm
▼
CPA window
6. Select a CPA limit desired from 0.5 nm, 1 nm, 2 nm, 3 nm, 5 nm and 6 nm with the
Trackball.
8. Choose TCPA.
9. Press the EDIT soft key to show the TCPA window.
TCPA
▲
~ 30 seconds
{ 1 minute
{ 2 minutes
{ 3 minutes
{ 4 minutes
{ 5 minutes
{ 6 minutes
{ 12 minutes
▼
TCPA window
10. Select a TCPA limit from 30 sec, 1 min, 2 min, 3 min, 4 min, 5 min, 6 min and 12 min.
5.8 Proximity Alarm

The proximity alarm alerts when there are AIS targets within the range you set. When an
AIS target comes within the proximity alarm range, the message AIS TARGET COMES
CLOSE appears.

5. Choose PROXIMITY ALARM and push the ENTER knob.
6. Enter proximity alarm range (0.01-24 nm) and press the ENTER soft key.
5-6
5. AIS OPERATION
5.9 Showing, Hiding AIS Target Tracks

AIS target tracks may be shown or hidden as follows
2. Use the Cursor pad to select TARGET TRACK DISPLAY.
3. Press the EDIT soft key to show the target track display window.
4. Use the Cursor pad to select one of the following:
OFF (no ARP nor AIS): Turn off target tracks.
ON (ARP and AIS): Turn on target tracks
ARP ONLY (ARP equipped): Show only ARP tracks.
AIS ONLY (AIS equipped): Show only AIS tracks.
BOTH: Show both ARP and AIS tracks.
5.10 Choosing Vector Time

The vector is the line extending from a tracked target which shows estimated speed and
course of the target. The vector tip shows an estimated position of the target after the
selected vector time elapses. It can be useful to extend the vector length (time) in order to
evaluate the risk of collision with any target.

5. Choose VECTOR TIME and then press the EDIT soft key to show the AIS vector time
window.
AIS VECTOR TIME

▲
~ 30 seconds
{ 1 minute
{ 3 minutes
{ 6 minutes
{ 15 minutes
{ 30 minutes
▼
AIS vector time window

6. Operate the Cursor pad to select vector time among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min, 6 min, 15
min and 30 min.
5-7
5. AIS OPERATION
5.11 Displaying Past Positions of AIS Targets

You can display time-spaced dots (maximum ten dots) marking the past positions of any
AIS targets being tracked. You can evaluate a target’s actions by the spacing between dots.
Below are examples of dot spacing and target movement.
(a) Ship turning (b) Ship running (c) Ship reduced (d) Ship increased
straight speed speed
AIS past position displays

To turn the AIS past position display on or off:

5. Choose HISTORY INTERVAL and then press the EDIT soft key.
HISTORY INTERVAL
▲
~ OFF
{ 30 seconds
{ 1 minute
{ 3 minutes
{ 6 minutes
▼
History interval window

6. Operate the Cursor pad to select history interval among 30 sec, 1 min, 3 min and 6 min,
or select OFF to turn off the past position display.
5-8
6. DATA TRANSFER
6. DATA TRANSFER
This chapter provides information for saving and replaying data to and from memory cards,
uploading and downloading data, loading waypoint data from Yeoman, and outputting data
through the network.
6.1 Memory Card Operations

The memory cards store these data: marks, lines, waypoints, routes, track, position, water
temperature and setting data (plotter only). The following memory cards may be used:
Kingstone: SD-M64B1 (64 MB), SD-M128B1 (128 MB)

Viking: SD-M32B1 (32 MB), SD-M64B1 (64 MB)
EP Memory: 32 MB, 64 MB
SANDISK: SDSDB-64-J60 (64 MB), SDSDB-128-J60 (128 MB)
Panasonic: RP-SD064BL1A (64 MB), RP-SD128BL1A (128 MB)
Toshiba: SD-NA064MT (64 MB), 128 SD-NA128MT (128 MB)
6.1.1 Deleting all data from memory cards (other than chart data)
Follow the procedure below to delete all data other than chart data from a memory card.
1. Insert a blank memory card into the card slot.

2. Press the MENU key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, DATA TRANSFER,
UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA and SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD soft keys to show
the SAVE DATA menu.
SAVE
TRACKS DATA
▲
OFF
MARKS & LINES
EDIT
OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
OFF
SAVE
SETTING DATA*
OFF
FORMAT
RETURN
* = Plotter data only
Save data menu

3. Press the DELETE soft key. You are asked if you are ready to delete the memory card.
4. Push the ENTER knob to delete (or press the CLEAR key to escape). Do not remove
the card while its contents are being deleted. When the deleting is completed,
“COMPLETED DELETING USER DATA. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.”
appears.
5. Push the ENTER knob to continue.
6-1
6. DATA TRANSFER
Note: If the memory card was not inserted correctly, the message “FAILED TO FORMAT
MEMORY CARD.” appears.
6.1.2 Saving data to a memory card

1. Insert a formatted memory card into the slot.
2. Press the MENU key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, DATA TRANSFER,
UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA and SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD soft keys to show
the SAVE DATA menu.
3. Use the Cursor pad to select item to save.
7. Repeat steps 3 to 6 to choose other data to save if desired.
8. Press the SAVE soft key, then press the ENTER knob. The message “NOW SAVING
DATA TO MEMORY CARD. DO NOT TURN OFF DISPLAY UNIT UNTIL
COMPLETED.” appears.
When saving is completed, “COMPLETED SAVING DATA. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO

CONTINUE.” appears. Push the ENTER knob to continue.
Memory card messages

Various memory card messages appear to alert you to memory card-related error. These
are tabulated below.
Memory card messages
Message Reason Remedy

Memory card is not Memory card not Push the ENTER knob to return to the
inserted. Please insert inserted. SAVE DATA display and then insert card.
memory card. Push
ENTER knob to continue.
Overwrite data? Data type to be Push the ENTER knob to overwrite same
(Track) recorded exists on data type on the card, or press the CLEAR
(Mark) memory card. (Two or key to escape.
(WPT) more of same type of
(Config) data cannot be
recorded.)
Failed to save data. Push Could not save data. Push the ENTER knob to continue.
ENTER knob to continue.
6-2
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.1.3 Playing back data from a memory card

Data (track, marks, lines, waypoints, routes and setting data) can be loaded from a memory
card and displayed on the screen. This feature is useful for observing past data and setting
up the equipment for a specific purpose with “setting data.”
1. Press the MENU key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION and DATA
TRANSFER soft keys.
2. Press the UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA soft key.
3. Press the LOAD DATA FROM MEMORY CARD soft key to show the LOAD DATA
menu.
LOAD
TRACKS DATA
▲
OFF
MARKS & LINES
EDIT
OFF
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
OFF
LOAD
SETTING DATA*
OFF
WALLPAPER
OFF
RETURN * = Plotter data only
Load data menu

4. Use the cursor pad to select item to load.
5. Press the EDIT soft key. (The EDIT soft key is inoperative when no memory card is
inserted or there is no data in the memory card.)
6. Use the cursor pad to select ON. (Select OFF not to load selected data.) Press the
ENTER soft key. If the memory card does not contain the item selected, the unit beeps
and ON cannot be selected.
7. After selecting all items desired, press the LOAD soft key, then press the ENTER knob.
The message “NOW LOADING FROM MEMORY CARD.” appears.
8. After loading is completed, the message “COMPLETED LOADING DATA. PUSH
ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the ENTER knob to continue.
Notes on loading data

Tracks: Since loaded track data is added to internal track, oldest track will be erased when
the track memory capacity is exceeded.
Waypoints & routes: The loaded data replaces like stored data.
Marks & lines: The loaded data is added to internal data. When the mark/line memory
becomes full no marks may be entered.
Setting data: The loaded data replaces current configuration settings. If the memory card
contents could not be loaded, push the ENTER knob to restart with default settings. Note
that track memory capacity is not saved or loaded. To use loaded setting data, turn the
power off and on again.
Wallpaper: Load desired wallpaper.
6-3
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.2 Uploading, Downloading Data

You can upload/download waypoints, routes, marks and lines from/to a PC, through the
DATA 4 port at the rear of the display unit. Note that radar and sounder data cannot be
uploaded or downloaded.
6.2.1 Setting communication software on the PC

The communication format (RS-232C) with the PC is as follows:
Baud Rate: 4800 bps
Character Length: 8 bits
Stop bit: 1 bit
Parity: None
X Control: XON/XOFF (fixed)
The following data can be downloaded/uploaded between a PC and this equipment:

Waypoint data (In alphanumeric order)
Route data (In order of route number)
End of sentence
Note 1: There are two kinds of data for route data: route data and route comment data.
Note 2: DGPS position fix is not available when uploading or downloading data.
Note 3: Wiring information appears on the UPLOAD or DOWNLOAD menu.
6.2.2 Uploading or downloading data

1. Connect the PC to the equipment.
2. Press the MENU key to show the main menu.
4. Press the DATA TRANSFER soft key.
5. Press the UPLOAD/DOWNLOAD DATA soft key.
6. Press the DOWNLOAD WPT/ROUTE TO PC or UPLOAD WPT/ROUTE FROM PC soft
key.
WAYPOINT & ROUTES WAYPOINT & ROUTES DOWN-
▲
▲
UPLOAD
OFF OFF LOAD
MARKS & LINES MARKS & LINES
OFF OFF
RS232C SETTINGS EDIT RS232C SETTINGS EDIT
· 4800BPS, · 4800BPS,
· 8BIT, · 8BIT,
·1STOP BIT, ·1STOP BIT,
· PARITY NONE, UPLOAD · PARITY NONE, DWLOAD
· CONTROL Xon/Xoff · CONTROL Xon/Xoff
SELECT WIRING INFORMATION SELECT

WIRING INFORMATION BPS BPS
DISPLAY UNIT PC: DSUB9 DISPLAY UNIT PC: DSUB9
TxD >1>-WHITE-<2<RD TxD >1>-WHITE-<2<RD
RxD >2>-BLUE-<3<SD RxD >2>-BLUE-<3<SD
RD-A >3>-YELLOW RD-A >3>-YELLOW
RD-B >4>-GREEN RD-B >4>-GREEN
+12V >5>-RED +12V >5>-RED
EXT BUZZ>6>-BLACK RETURN EXT BUZZ>6>-BLACK RETURN
GND >7>-SHIELD-<5<SG GND >7>-SHIELD-<5<SG
Upload and download menus

7. To change the baud rate, press the SELECT BPS soft key.
6-4
6. DATA TRANSFER
BAUD RATE
▲
¤ 4800 bps
¡ 9600 bps
¡ 19200 bps
▼
Baud rate window

8. Select baud rate, then press the ENTER soft key.
9. Press the DWLOAD or UPLOAD soft key. You are asked if you are ready to download
or upload waypoints and routes.
10. Push the ENTER knob to download (upload).
Waypoint data format
PFEC, GPwpl, llll.llll, a, yyyyy.yyy, a, c----c, c, c----c, a <CR><LF>

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Waypoint data format

1: Waypoint latitude
2: N/S
3: Waypoint longitude
4: E/W
5: Waypoint name (Number of characters is fixed to 6 and space code is placed when the
number of characters are less than 6.)
6: Waypoint color
7: Waypoint comment (1 byte for mark code + 13 characters of comment.)
1st byte of mark code: Fixed to “@”.
2nd byte of mark code: Internal mark code. See Note 1.
8. Information of marking waypoint. Always set to “A”.
“A”: Displayed
“V”: Not displayed
Note 1: The following characters can be used for comments:
_ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789&'#
=9 =: =; =< ==
=> =? =@ =A
=B =C =D =E
=F =G =H
Characters available for comment
6-5
6. DATA TRANSFER
Route data menu
$GPRTE, x, x, a, ccc, c----c, c----c, ... , c----c <CR><LF>

1 2 3 4 5 6 12
Route data format

1: Number of sentences required for one complete route data (1 to 4). See Note 2.
2: Number of sentences currently used (1 to 4)
3: Message mode (Always set to C)
4: Route No. (001 to 300, 3 digits required)
5 through 12: Waypoint name (Max. 8 names, length of each waypoint name is fixed to 7
byte)
Note : A route can may contain 35 waypoints, and the GPRTE sentence for one route data
may exceed 80 byte limitation. In this case, route data is divided into several GPRTE
sentences (Max. 4 sentences). This value shows the number of sentences the route data
has been divided.
Route comment data format
$PFEC, GPrtc, xx, c----c <CR><LF>

1 2
Route comment format
1: Route No. (01 to 200, 3 digits required)

2: Route comment (Max. 16 characters, variable length)
The same characters of the comment for waypoint comment can be used.
End of sentence
$PFEC, GPxfr, CTL, E <CR><LF>
End of sentence
6-6
6. DATA TRANSFER
Mark data menu
$PFEC, GPmrk, xxxxxxxx, xxxxxxxx, xxxxxxxx, x, x, x, xxxxxxxx, c----c<CR><LF>

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Mark data format

1: Geodetic latitude (Latitude in minutes, hexadecimal)
2: Longitude (longitude in minutes, hexadecimal)
3: Mercator latitude (latitude in minutes, hexadecimal)
4: Mark code
5: Color (0: black, 1: red, 2: yellow, 3: green, 4: light-blue, 5: purple, 6: blue, 7: white)
6: Status (hexadecimal number)
(b0: (0/1)=mark/line), b1: (0/1)=(memory/replay)
b2: reserve
b3: External event (0/1)=(no/YES), b4: Line connection (=1: connect to the previous)
b [5, 6]: Line type
7: Time entered (Hexadecimal number, total seconds from 1986/1/1 00:00:00 as reference)
8: Comment (Max. 15 characters, including the code not required for NMEA)
6.3 Loading Waypoint Data from Yeoman

Waypoint data can be loaded from a Yeoman to this equipment. Connect the Yeoman to a
DATA port on this equipment and then follow the procedure below.

2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION key.
4. Press the RECEIVE YEOMAN DATA soft key.
5. You are asked if you are sure to receive waypoint data from Yeoman equipment. Push
the ENTER knob to receive the data. The message “NOW RECEIVING YEOMAN DATA.
PUSH SOFT KEY ‘STOP’ TO STOP RECEIVING.” Is displayed. If waypoint capacity is
reached the message “WAYPOINTS FULL. NO MORE WAYPOINT CAN BE
RECEIVED. PUSH ANY KEY TO STOP.” appears. To stop receiving, press the STOP
soft key.
After waypoints have been received, press the MENU key.
6-7
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.4 Receiving Data Via Network Equipment

1. You can receive waypoints, routes, marks and lines from NavNet equipment.

5. Press the RECEIVE DATA VIA NETWORK soft key.
HOST NAME RECEIVE

DATA
PLOT - - - -
MARKS & LINES
OFF EDIT
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES
OFF
RCV
RETURN
Receive data menu

6. Select HOST NAME, then press the EDIT soft key.
HOST NAME
▲
¤ 1 (NAVNET1)
¡ 2 (NAVNET2)
¡ 3 (NAVNET3)
¡ 4 (NAVNET4)
▼
Host name window

7. Use the cursor pad to choose host name from which to receive data, then push the
ENTER knob.
8. Select the data you wish to receive, then press the EDIT soft key. For example, select
MARKS & LINES.
MARKS & LINES

▲
¡ ON
¤ OFF
▼
Marks & lines window

9. Select ON or OFF as appropriate, then press the ENTER soft key.
10. Turn WAYPOINTS & ROUTES on or off as appropriate.
11. Press the RCV soft key followed by the ENTER knob. The message “NOW RECEIVING
DATA.” is displayed. If no data could be found, the message “(HOST NAME)’ IS NOT
FOUND.” appears. When the transfer is completed, the message “DATA TRANSFER
COMPLETED. PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CONTINUE.” appears. Push the ENTER knob
to finish.
6-8
6. DATA TRANSFER
6.5 Outputting Data Through the Network

Follow the procedure below to output data through the network. To prevent trouble, do not
output the same data from multiple sources.

2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP, PORT SETUP and OUTPUT
THROUGH NETWORK soft keys.
SELECT
SELECT SENTENCE
SNTNC
AAM --
APB --
BOD -- ON/OFF
BWR --
DPT --
GGA --
GLL --
GTD --
MTW --
RMA --
RMB --
RMC --
VHW -- RETURN
VTG --
WPL --
XTE --
ZDA --
HDT --
HDG --
MWV --
ZTG --
Select sentence menu

3. Select sentence with the cursor pad.
4. Press the ON/OFF soft key to turn sentence on or off.
AAM: Waypoint arrival alarm

APB: Autopilot sentence B
BOD: Bearing origin to destination
BWR: Bearing and distance to waypoint - rhumb line
DPT: Depth
GGA: Global positioning system(GPS) fix data
GLL: Geographic position - latutude/longitude
GTD: Own ship information-TD
MTW: Water temperature
RMA: Recommended minimum specific LORAN-C data
RMB: Recommended minimum navigation information
RMC: Recommended minimum specific GPS/TRANSIT data
VHW: Water speed and heading
VTG: Course over ground and ground speed
WPL: Waypoint location
XTE: Cross-track error, measured
ZDA: Time and date
HDT: Heading true,
HDG: Heading, deviation and variation
MWV: Wind speed and angle
ZTG: Time to go
6-9
6. DATA TRANSFER
6-10
7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT
This chapter describes the various options which allow you to set up your unit to suit your
needs. For mode-specific menus, e.g. radar, plotter and sounder, make sure that you select
the appropriate display when making changes or viewing menu options.
7.1 General Setup

This paragraph shows you how to set up functions common to the plotter, radar and
sounder displays. This is done on the GENERAL SETUP menu, which you may display
from any mode. These items include language, key beep, units of measurement, data
sources, etc.

GENERAL GENERAL
▲
KEY BEEP
SETUP 2
▲
ON
SETUP 1 LAT/LON DISPLAY
DD° MM.MMM'
LANGUAGE
TD DISPLAY
ENGLISH EDIT EDIT
RANGE UNIT LORAN C
nm, kt SPEED
TEMPERATURE UNIT DST SOG
°C
ON/OFF POSITION DISPLAY
DEPTH UNIT LAT/LON
ft TIME DISPLAY
WIND UNIT 24 HOURS
kt NEXT INFRARED REMOTE MODE
SPEED AVERAGING PAGE A
0060second (s)
RANGE & BEARING MODE
LOCAL TIME OFFSET
RHUMB LINE PREV.
+00:00
RESET TRIP LOG
RETURN BEARING READOUT PAGE
NO MAGNETIC
TIMEOUT DISPLAY SETTING MAGNETIC VARIATION
15sec AUTO 7.0° W
SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION AIR PRESSURE UNIT
SAVE SHIP hPa
POSITION & MOB
WALLPAPER
DEFAULT
Page 1 Page 2
General setup menu

4. Press the NEXT PAGE or PREV. PAGE soft key to switch pages if necessary.
5. Use the Cursor pad to select item.
7. Use the Cursor pad to select option desired, then press the ENTER soft key.
7-1
Contents of general setup menu
Item Description Settings

Key Beep Turns key beep on/off. On, Off
Language Chooses menu language. English, French, German, Italian, Portuguese,
Spanish, Danish, Swedish, Norwegian
Range Unit Chooses unit of range and speed nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm & yd, kt; nm &
measurement. m, kt; km & m, km/h; sm & yd, mph
Temperature Chooses unit of water temperature °C,°F
Unit measurement.
Depth Unit Chooses unit of depth measurement. m, ft, fa, P/B (Passi/Braza)
Wind Unit Chooses unit of wind measurement. Kt, km/h, MPH, m/s
Wind Data Chooses how to display wind data. Apparent: The wind felt aboard a moving
vessel. It is the combination of the true wind
and the boat wind. True: The true speed and
direction of the wind, not modified by the
effects of the boat's movement.
Speed Calculation of ETA is based on average 0-9999 seconds
Averaging ship’s speed over a given period. If the
period is too long or too short,
calculation error will result. Change this
setting if calculation error occurs. The
default setting is suitable for most
conditions.
Local Time Enter time difference between local -13:30 to +13:30. For multiple display unit
Offset time and UTC time to use local time. configuration, all units should have the same
time offset.
Reset Trip Log Resets trip log. Yes, No
Timeout Sets number of seconds to show a 15 s, 30 s, 60 s, Continue (no timeout)
Display window (for example, BRILL, GAIN)
Setting before it is erased from the screen.
Save MOB Defines the function of the SAVE/MOB Save Ship Position & MOB: Short press to
Key Function key. save ship position, long press to save MOB.
MOB Without Confirmation: Position saved
as MOB position without confirmation. This
setting is only effective with automatic range
selection and with waypoint marker displayed
on radar display.
Quick Point Function: Position saved as
quick point.
Wallpaper Chooses what to display in menu Default: Default wallpaper
background. User: User wallpaper. To use your own
Requirements for user wallpaper wallpaper, save Microsoft Photo Editor or
Size: 252 KB or less, 480(H)x640(V) Adobe Photoshop created png image (see
Name: wallpaperv.png conditions at left) to SD card, load file to
No. of Colors: 256 equipment (see Chapter 6) and then choose
Compression Level: None this User option.
Interlace: None
Permeation Color: None
Lat/Lon Chooses how many digits (or seconds) DD°MM.MM’, DD°MM.MMM’,
Display to display after decimal point in latitude DD°MM.MMMM’, DD°MM’SS.S”
and longitude position.
(Con’t on next page)
7-2
Contents of general setup menu (con’t from previous page)

TD Display Chooses type of TD to display. Loran C, Decca
Speed Chooses speed format to display. SOG (Speed over ground), STW (Speed
through water)
Position Chooses how to display position. Latitude, Longitude; Loran or Decca TDs,
Display Examples of MGRS indications: or MGRS (Military Grid Reference
System).
18S: Locating a point within the Grid
What is MGRS?
Zone Designation
18SUU: Locating a point within a For convenience, the world is generally
100,000-meter square divided into 6° by 8° geographic areas,
18SUU80: Locating a point within a each of which is given a unique
10,000-meter square identification, called the Grid Zone
18SUU8401: Locating a point within a Designation. These areas are covered by
1,000-meter square a pattern of 100,000-meter squares.
18SUU836014: Locating a point within Each square is identified by two letters
a 100-meter square called tie 100,000-meter square
identification. This identification is unique
within the area covered by the Grid Zone
Designation. Exceptions to this general
rule have been made in the post to
preserve the 100,000-meter
identifications on mapping that already
exists.
A reference keyed to a gridded map of
any scale is made by giving the 100,000-
meter square identification together with
the numerical location. Numerical
references within the 100,000-mater
square are given to the desired accuracy
in terms of the easting (E) and northing
(N) grid coordinates for the point. The
Grid Zone Designation usually is prefixed
to the identification when references are
made in more than one grid zone
designation area.
Time Display Chooses time notation. 12 hours, 24 hours
Infrared A remote controller can be set A, B, C, D
Remote exclusively for use with a specific
Mode display unit, in the case of multiple
NavNet display units. For further details
see the Installation Manual.
7-3
Contents of general setup menu (con’t from previous page)

Range & Chooses how to calculate range and Great Circle: Shortest course between
Bearing bearing. two points on the surface of the earth.
Mode Rhumb Line: Straight line drawn
between two points on a nautical chart.
Bearing Chooses bearing display format for True, Magnetic
Readout course, course over ground and cursor
bearing.
Magnetic The magnetic variations for all areas of Auto, Manual
Variation the earth are preprogrammed into this
unit. The preprogrammed variation is
accurate for most instances, however
you may wish to manually enter a
variation. For manual input, select
Manual, hit the EDIT soft key, enter
value, then hit the ENTER soft key to
set. “AUTO” requires position data.
Air Pressure Chooses unit of air pressure HPa, mbar, mmHg, inHg
Unit measurement.
AIS OPTION See chapter 5.
soft key
7.2 Radar Setup

DISPLAY
EBL REFERENCE
This paragraph explains how to customize the SETUP
RELATIVE
radar display to suit your operational needs. CURSOR POSITION EDIT
RNG & BRG-REL
7.2.1 Radar display setup TUNING
▲
AUTO D. BOX
The radar display may be set up from the RADAR TX SECTOR BLANKING
DISPLAY SETUP menu, which contains items OFF 000° 001°
such as EBL reference and cursor position format. NOISE REJECTION
ON
BACKGROUND COLOR
1. Press the MENU key to show the main menu. BLACK/GREEN
2. Press the RADAR DISPLAY SETUP soft key. ECHO COLOR
GREEN
WATCHMAN TIME RETURN
5 minutes
RANGE UNIT
nm
Radar display setup menu
7-4
Contents of radar display setup menu

EBL References EBL bearing, shown in the True, Relative
Reference EBL data box, to North (True) or
heading (Relative). Relative with no
heading input. True only in course-up,
north-up and true motion.
Cursor Chooses how to display cursor position. LAT/LON: Lat/Long position of cursor
Position TD: Loran C or Decca TDs
RNG & BRG-REL: Range and bearing
Note: “RNG & BRG-TRUE” requires
in relative bearing.
heading data, true bearing. Reverts to
RNG & BRG-TRUE: Range and
relative bearing when heading data is
bearing in true bearing.
lost.
MGRS: MGRS format position
Tuning Selects receiver tuning method. For Auto, Manual

further details see the paragraph “2.3
Tuning.”
TX Sector Turns on/off dead sector graphic, which On, Off
Blanking shows area where no echoes are
received. To set sector, select ON, then
enter range. Max. sector is 135°.
Dashed lines mark the dead sector.
Note that noise may occasionally
appear in the TX sector when the echo
trail feature is turned on.
Dead sector
Noise Electrical noise, appearing on the Off, Low, High

Rejection screen as “speckles,” may be
suppressed with the noise rejector.
Note that some forms of interference
cannot be suppressed.
7-5
Contents of radar display setup menu (con’t from previous page)

Background Chooses colors of background, Black/Green
Color range rings and characters. Background: Black
Effective when HUE soft key is set Rings: Green
for MANUAL SET. Characters: Green
Black/Red
Background: Black
Rings: Green
Characters: Red
Blue/White
Background: Blue
Rings: White
Characters: White
DK Blue/White
Background: Dark Blue
Rings: Green
Characters: Red
White/Green
Background: White
Rings: Green
Characters: Green
Echo Color Chooses echo color. Yellow, Green,
Multi-color. (Multi-color shows echoes
in red, yellow or green in order of
descending strength.)
Watchman Sets watchman stand-by period. 5, 10, 20 minutes
Time For further details see the
paragraph “ 2.23 Watchman.”
Range Unit Select unit of range measurement. nm, km, sm
7-6
7.2.2 Radar range setup

You may choose the radar ranges you wish to use, from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu.
After choosing the ranges desired, change the range with the RANGE key to activate range
settings. Available ranges depends on the radar used.
At least two ranges must be turned on. When less than two ranges are turned on you
cannot escape from the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu.
Note that this function is not available with the GD-1720C.
1. Press the MENU key to show the main menu.

2. Press the RADAR RANGE SETUP soft key to show the RADAR RANGE SETUP menu.
RANGE RANGE
0.125nm ON 0.25km ON
SETUP SETUP
0.25nm ON 0.5km ON
0.5nm ON ON/OFF 0.75km ON ON/OFF
0.75nm ON 1km OFF
1nm OFF 1.5km ON
▲
▲
1.5nm ON 2km OFF
2nm OFF 3km ON
3nm ON 4km OFF
4nm OFF 6km ON
6nm ON 8km OFF
8nm OFF 12km ON
12nm ON 16km OFF
16nm OFF 24km ON
24nm ON 36km ON
36nm ON RETURN 48km OFF RETURN
48nm OFF 64km OFF

64nm OFF 72km OFF
72nm OFF
MAXIMUM RANGE XXkm*
MAXIMUM RANGE XXnm*
* = Max. range depends on network radar used and is set on the network radar at installation.
Range unit: nm Range unit: km
Radar range setup menu

3. Use the Cursor pad to select the range which you want to turn on or off.
4. Press the ON/OFF soft key to turn a range on or off as appropriate.
5. Press the RETURN soft key to register settings.
Model Maximum Range

1824C, 1724C, 1734C 24 nm, km, sm
1834C 36 nm, km, sm
1934C 48 nm, km, sm
1944C 64 nm, km, sm
1954C, 1964C 72 nm, km, sm
7-7
7.2.3 Function key setup

The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default radar
Function Key Default Function Function Key Label

1 Turn heading line off. HL
2 Turn range rings on/off. RNG
3 Turn echo trail on/off. TRL
4 Turn display offcenter on/off. OFC
5 STBY/TX TX
If the above settings are not to your liking you may change them as follows:

2. Press the FUNCTION KEY SETUP soft key.
FUNC
Function key KEY
▲
SOFT KEY 1
setting HL: HDG LINE OFF
EDIT
Function H
key label SOFT KEY 2 L

RNG: RINGS ON/OFF
R
N
SOFT KEY 3 G
TRL: ECHO TRAIL

T
R
SOFT KEY 4 L
OFC: OFFCENTER
O
F
SOFT KEY 5 C
TX: STBY/TX
RETURN
T
X
Radar function key menu

3. Select the function key you want to program, then press the EDIT soft key.
SOF TKEY 1 SOFT KEY 1

▲
OFF
HL: HDG LINE OFF ALM: GUARD ALARM
MOD: MODE EBL: EBL
GAI: GAIN VRM: VRM
Scroll TTM: TTM ON/OFF
SEA: A/C SEA down
RAI: A/C RAIN WMK: WPT ON/OFF
FTC: FTC WTM: WATCHMAN
ES: ECHO STRETCH ACQ: ACQUISITION
PLS: PULSE LENGTH TX : STBY/TX
ZOM: ZOOM RSR: RADAR SOURCE
OFC: OFFCENTER DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
TRL: ECHO TRAIL CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF QP : QUICK POINT
TLL: TLL OUTPUT MRK: MARK ENTRY
▲
Radar function key options
7-8
4. Select function desired with the Cursor pad, then press the ENTER soft key or ENTER
knob to register your selection.
Radar function keys
Function Key
Menu Item Function
Label
OFF Assigns no function. —
HL: HDG LINE OFF Turns heading line off. HL
MOD: MODE Selects presentation mode. MOD
GAI: GAIN Shows gain sensitivity adjustment window. GAI
SEA: A/C SEA Shows A/C SEA adjustment window. SEA
RAI: A/C RAIN Shows A/C RAIN adjustment window. RAI
FTC: FTC Displays FTC window. Available with Model 1700 FTC
series radar. Inoperative otherwise.
ES: ECHO STRETCH Turns echo stretch on/off. ES
PLS: PULSE LENGTH Sets pulselength (long or short). PLS
ZOM: ZOOM Turns zoom on/off. ZOM
OFC: OFFCENTER Press to shift display center to cursor location. OFC
Press again to turn shift off and return cursor to
display center.
TRL: ECHO TRAIL Starts/stops echo trails. TRL
RNG: RINGS ON/OFF Turns range rings on/off. RNG
TLL: TLL OUTPUT Outputs cursor position, in NMEA format, to TLL
navigator.
ALM: GUARD ALARM Displays alarm soft keys. ALM
EBL: EBL Switches control between EBL1 and EBL2 with EBL
each press.
VRM: VRM Switches control between VRM1 and VRM2 with VRM
each press.
TTM: TTM ON/OFF Turns TTM (Tracked Target Message) display TTM
on/off.
WMK: WPT ON/OFF Turns waypoint marker on/off. WMK
WTM: WATCHMAN Turns watchman on/off. WTM
ACQ: ACQUISITION Acquires and tracks cursor-selected target. ACQ
(Requires ARP-equipped Model 18x4/19x4 series
network radar.)
TX: STBY/TX Toggles between standby and transmit TX
RSR: RADAR SOURCE Selects source for radar picture. RSR
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF Turns data boxes on/off. DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL Changes display control in combination display. CHG
QP: QUICK POINT Quick point function QP
MRK: MARK ENTRY Enters the mark at the cursor position. MRK
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
7-9
7.3 Plotter Setup

This paragraph provides the information necessary for setting up the plotter display.
7.3.1 Navigation options

Navigation options, for example, waypoint switching method, may be set on the PLOTTER
SETUP menu. For C-MAP specification, this menu is followed by the PLOTTER SETTINGS
menu.
1. Show the plotter display, then press the MENU key open the main menu.
PLOTTER
WAYPOINT SWITCHING SETUP
ARRVL ALM CRCL
COURSE VECTOR
EDIT
LINE
SET GOTO METHOD
1POINT D. BOX
QP
INTERNAL
SAFE ROUTE CHECK*
OFF
POPUP INFO
POINTS ON
QPT/MARK SOFT KEY
QUICK POINT RETURN
SHIP SHAPE
BOAT(L)
*: C-MAP only.
Plotter setup menu
Contents of plotter setup menu

Waypoint Chooses waypoint switching method. See Perpendicular, Arrvl Alm
Switching “switching waypoints” on page 3-45. Crcl, Manual
Course You may extend a line from the own ship position to Vector, Line, Off
Vector show ship’s course. It may be a vector (length
depends on ship’s speed) or a simple line (course
bar).
Set GOTO Sets the method by which to navigate to a quick 1 Point, 35 Points,
Method point. See “3.10.1 Navigating to a quick point.” 35 Pts/Port Service
QP Set “EXT WPT (RMB)” when a destination waypoint EXT WPT (RMB),
is displayed from a external navigation equipment. Internal
Safe Route The safe route check feature checks for interfering On, Off
Check objects (such as wrecks) within a route when
(C-MAP only) creating or editing a route.
7-10
(Con’t from previous page)

Popup Info You may show the information for objects as below. ALL ON, POINTS ON,
(C-Map only) OFF: No information appears. OFF
ALL ON: When the cursor is placed on anywhere
on chart, the information for that location appears.
POINTS ON: When the cursor is placed on an
object symbol, the information for it appears.
QPT/MARK Chooses the function of the uppermost soft key on QUICK POINT, MARK
Soft Key the plotter display between QUICK POINT and ENTRY
MARK ENTRY.
QUICK POINT: Enters the quick point at the cursor
or own ship position.
MARK ENTRY: Enters the mark at the cursor or
own ship position.
SHIP SHAPE Chooses configuration for own ship marker. BOAT(L), BOAT(S),
CIRCLE, CROSS
D. BOX Sets up data boxes. See paragraph 7.5.
(soft key)

The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default plotter
Function Function Key Label
Default Function
Key
1 Start/stop recording/plotting own ship’s track. TRK
2 Edit mark/line. EML
3 Ruler (measure range and bearing between two points). RUL
4 Add new waypoint. ADD
5 Alphanumeric waypoint list. ALP

FUNC
KEY
Function key X SOFT KEY 1
setting TRK: TRACK ON/OFF EDIT
T
Function R
key label SOFT KEY 2 K
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
E
M
SOFT KEY 3 L
RUL: RULER
R
U
SOFT KEY 4 L
ADD: ADD NEW WPT

A
D
SOFT KEY 5 D
ALP: ALPHA LIST RETURN
A
L
P
Plotter function key menu
7-11
3. Select the soft key you want to program, then press the EDIT soft key. A menu shows
the functions available and the current selection is highlighted.
SOF TKEY 1
OFF
ADD: ADD NEW WPT
MWP: MOVE WPT
RUL: RULER
GWP: GOTO WPT
GRT: GOTO ROUTE
EML: EDIT MK/LINE
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF
TTM: TTM ON/OFF
DTT: DEL TGT TRK

ALP: ALPHA LIST
Scroll LCL: LOCAL LIST
RTE: ROUTE LIST
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF

CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
QP : QUICK POINT
MRK: MARK ENTRY
Plotter function key options
7-12
Plotter function keys
Function Key
Menu Item Function
Label
OFF Assigns no function. —
ADD: ADD NEW WPT Registers waypoint at cursor position. Place cursor ADD
for waypoint location, then press function key.
MWP: MOVE WPT Moves selected waypoint to different position. MWP
Select waypoint, press function key, select new
position, then press the ENTER knob.
RUL: RULER Measures range and bearing between two points. RUL
Press START POINT soft key to change starting
point if necessary. Range and bearing between two
points appears at the top of the screen.
GWP: GOTO WPT Specify waypoint to set as destination. Enter GWP
waypoint name in window, then press the ENTER
soft key.
GRT: GOTO ROUTE Specify route to follow. Enter route name in window, GRT
then press the ENTER soft key.
EML: EDIT MK/LINE Displays mark & line menu. Press appropriate soft EML
key to access menu item.
TRK: TRACK ON/OFF Each press starts or stops recording/plotting own TRK
ship’s track.
TTM: TTM ON/OFF Turns TTM (target track) display on/off. TTM
DTT: DEL TGT TRACK Erases all TTM track. DTT
ALP: ALPHA LIST Displays waypoint alphanumeric list. ALP
LCL: LOCAL LIST Displays waypoint local list. LCL
RTE: ROUTE LIST Displays route list. RTE
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF Shows/hides data boxes. DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL Changes control in combination screen. CHG
QP: QUICK POINT Quick point function QP
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
7-13
7.4 Chart Setup

This paragraph shows you how to setup digital charts, from offsetting chart position to
turning chart attributes on or off.
7.4.1 Chart offset

In some instances position may be off by a few seconds. For example, the position of the
ship is shown to be at sea while it is in fact moored at a pier. You can compensate for this
error by offsetting chart position as shown in the procedure below.
1. Show the plotter display, then press the MENU key followed by the CHART SETUP and
CHART OFFSET soft keys.
+124
34 24. 3456 N 359.9°M
24. 3456 W 59.9kt
CHART
OFFSET
SET
OFFSET
RESET
OFFSET
RETURN
Plotter display, chart offset selected

2. Use the Cursor pad to place the cursor at the correct latitude and longitude position of
own ship.
3. Press the SET OFFSET soft key.
4. Press the MENU key to close the menu. The “chart offset icon” ( ) appears at the top of
the display.
To cancel chart offset, press the RESET OFFSET soft key at step 3 in the above
procedure.
7-14
7.4.2 Navionics GOLD chart attributes

Navionics GOLD chart attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART
CONFIGURATION menu, which you may display as follows:

CHART CHART
LAT/LON GRID
▲
OBJECT INFORMATION
▲
CONFIG CONFIG
GREEN ALL ON
TEXT INFORMATION CHART DISPLAY
EDIT EDIT
ON DETAILED
WAYPOINTS NAVAIDS SYMBOL
LARGE CNTOUR INERNATIONAL
WAYPOINT NAMES LINE
CAUTION & ROUTING DATA
ON ON
CHART BORDER LINES MARINE FEATURES
ON ON
LIGHT SECTOR INFO LAND FEATURES
ON NEXT
ON
PAGE
RETURN PREV.
PAGE
Page 1 Page 2
Chart configuration menu (Navionics GOLD)
Contents of chart configuration menu (Navionics GOLD)

Lat/Lon Grid Latitude and longitude grids Red, yellow, green, light-blue,
purple, blue, white, Off
Text Information Geographic place, name On, Off
Waypoints Waypoint size Large, Small, Off
Waypoint Names Waypoint name On, Off
Chart Border Lines Border lines (indices) On, Off
Light Sector Info Lighthouse viewing sector On, Off
Object Information Map data Off, All On (display area data for
cursor-selected object), Points
On (display only point data for
cursor-selected object)
Chart Display Choose level of detail for map Detailed, Simple
Navaids Symbol Choose what kind of navaids International, US
symbols to display.
Caution & Routing Turn caution and routing data on On, Off
Data or off.
7-15
Contents of chart configuration menu (Navionics GOLD) (con’t from previous page)

Marine Features Turn marine features on or off. On, Off
Land Features Turn land features on or off. On, Off
CONTOUR LINE Soft key
Spot Soundings Turn water depth display on or off. On, Off
Safety Contour Paint areas in dark blue (default 2m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
color) which are shallower than 5 m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
depth value set. 10 m (or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
20 m or equivalent ft, fa or PB)
Depth Contour Display depth contours. ALL: Display all depth contours
5 m: Display only 5 m* depth
contours
contours.
contours
OFF: Turn off depth contours.
* Or equivalent ft, fa or PB.
7.4.3 C-MAP chart attributes

Displaying the CHART CONFIGURATION menu
C-MAP chart attributes may be turned on or off from the CHART CONFIGURATION menu:

2. Press the CHART SETUP and CHART CONFIGURATIONS soft keys.
PERSPECTIVE CHART CHART

SEABED TYPE
ON CONFIG CONFIG
PLOTTER OVERLAY
DE-CLUTTER PORTS & SERVICE
ON EDIT PLOTTER OVERLAY EDIT
CHART DISPLAY MODE UNDERWATER OBJECTS
FULL PLOTTER/OVERLAY
SAFETY STATUS DEPTH DEPTH
RIVERS & LAKES
CONFIG CONFIG
PLOTTER/OVERLAY PLOTTER/OVERLAY
WAYPOINT LAND FEATURES
WAYPOINT NAME LANDMARK
NAMES NEXT LAT/LONG GRID
PLOTTER/OVERLAY PAGE PLOTTER/OVERLAY
BUOYS NAME CHART BOUNDARIES
PLOTTER/OVERLAY AUTO PLOTTER/OVERLAY PREV.
NAV-AIDS RETURN
MIXING PAGE
US OFF
LIGHT SECTORS CHART LEVEL
FLASHING PLOTTER/OVERLAY UNLOCK
ATTENTION AREAS VALUE-ADDED DATA
TIDES CURRENTS CAMERA ICON
Page 1 Page 2
Chart configuration menu (C-MAP)
7-16
CHART CONFIGURATION menu description
CHART CONFIGURATION menu description

Object Content Settings Description
PERSPECTIVE Perspective ON Turns perspective display on.
display on/off OFF Turns perspective display off.
DE-CLUTTER Overlapping ON Removes overlapping objects from display.
object on/off OFF Displays overlapping objects.
CHART DISPLAY Choose chart FULL All chart attributes are displayed.
MODE display mode SIMPLE Some attributes such as SEABED TYPE,
TRACKS and ROUTES are displayed.
FISHING Setting for use in fishing.
LOW Only NAV AIDS and water depth are
shown.
CUSTOM User chooses which chart attributes to turn
on or off.
1
SAFETY STATUS* Safety status ON Safety status ON (See Safety Status
indication Indication on page 7-18 for description.)
OFF Safety status OFF
WAYPOINT Waypoints marks PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay displays.
and waypoint PLOT Shown on plotter display.
names OFF Waypoint markers and waypoint names
are turned off. Waypoint names are not
displayed regardless if WAYPOINT NAME
(below) is set to ON.
WAYPOINT NAME Waypoint names PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay displays.
PLOT Shown on plotter display.
OFF Waypoint names are turned off.
NAMES Text for land and PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay displays.
sea areas
OFF Names are turned off.
BUOYS NAME Name of buoys PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay displays.
OFF Buoy names are turned off.
NAV-AIDS Lighthouses, US NOAA symbols are shown.
buoys, etc. US SIMPLE Complex object shown with single icon.
INT International symbols are shown.
INT SIMPLE Complex object shown with single icon.
PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay displays.
OFF Navaids are turned off.
LIGHT SECTORS Light sector ON Light sectors displayed.
FLASHING Light sectors displayed and flashing.
ATTENTION Attention areas PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay displays.
AREAS PLOT Shown on plotter display.
OFF Attention areas are turned off.
TIDES & Tidal station and PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay displays.
CURRENTS current station PLOT Shown on plotter display.
OFF Tidal station and current station are not
shown. Tidal graph is also turned off.
(Con’t on next page.)
7-17
CHART CONFIGURATION menu description (con’t from previous page)

Object Content Setting Description
SEABED TYPE Seabed type PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
OFF Tidal station and current station
are not shown. Tidal graph is
also turned off.
PORTS & Ports and services PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay
SERVICES displays.
OFF Ports and services are not
shown. Near Service also not
shown.
TRACKS & Tracks and routes PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay
ROUTES displays.
OFF Tracks and routes are turned
off.
UNDER- Below-surface PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay
WATER obstructions such as displays.
OBJECTS wrecks PLOT Shown on plotter display.
OFF Underwater objects are turned
off.
RIVERS & Rivers and lakes PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay
LAKES displays.
OFF Rivers and lakes are turned off.
LAND Land features PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay
FEATURES displays.
OFF Rivers and lakes are turned off.
LANDMARKS Landmarks PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay
displays.
OFF Landmarks are turned off.
LAT/LON GRID Latitude and longitude PLOT/OVERLAY Shown on plotter and overlay
grids displays.
OFF Latitude and longitude grids
are turned off.
CHART Chart boundary lines ON Shown on plotter and overlay
BOUNDARIES displays.
AUTO Chart border lines are shown
for the last four charts in a
chart card on the plotter and
overlay displays
PLOT/OVERLAY Chart border lines show on
plotter and overlay displays.
PLOT Chart border lines show on
plotter display.
OFF Chart boundaries are turned
off.
(Con’t on next page.)
7-18
CHART CONFIGURATION menu description (con’t from previous page)

Object Content Setting Description
MIXING Changes chart scale to fit whole ON Mixing is active.
chart on display OFF Mixing is disabled.
CHART LEVEL Maintains current chart scale LOCK Keeps current chart scale.
regardless of zoom setting UNLOCK Chart scale may chosen freely.
VALUE- Show/hide the "Conservation PLOTTER/ Value-added data shown on plotter
ADDED DATA Area" for *Australian waters. OVERLAY and overlay displays.
(*Contact Australian authorities PLOTTER Value-added data shown on plotter
for details.) display.
OFF Value-added data is disabled.
CAMERA ICON Show/hide camera icon, which is PLOTTER/ Camera icon shown on plotter and
used to display an image from OVERLAY overlay displays.
icon location. To display an PLOTTER Camera icon shown on plotter
image, choose camera icon ( ), display.
push the ENTER knob and then OFF Camera icon is disabled.
press the IMAGE soft key.
*1 SAFETY STATUS INDICATION

The following indications are shown beneath the range indication to denote safety status:
SAFETY STATUS indication NORMAL (or U.ZOOM or O.ZOOM):

This indication appears to help you select a suitable
chart scale.
NORMAL BEST MAP DATA OFF NORMAL: Suitable chart scale is selected.
DE-CLUTTER DANGER
U.ZOOM: Chart scale is too small.

O.ZOOM: Chart scale is too large.
BEST MAP: Shown in red when the unsuitable chart
scale is selected.
DATA OFF: Mixing levels can be turned on when the
electronics chart coverage area does not provide
enough coverage to completely fill the display screen.
When the cursor or own ship mark is placed in the
area with coverage, the chart data is shown as
below.
On: The chart line in the area with no coverage is
shown. This area is filled with dots.
Off: The area with no coverage is not shown (goes to
white).
DECLUT.: For C-MAP MAX charts, symbols of low priority (ex. map symbols on land)
can be automatically hidden to unclutter the screen when you change the scale. When
the function is turned on, DECLUT. appears in red.
DANGERS: Shown in red when the GROUNDING alarm detects the high-risk object
(listed in the grounding report) when the GROUNDING alarm is turned on.
CAUTIONS: Shown in red when the GROUNDING alarm detects the low-risk object
when the GROUNDING alarm is turned on.
7-19
DEPTH CONFIG soft key

3. Press the DEPTH CONFIG soft key.
DEPTH
DEPTH SHADING CONFIGURATION:
CONFIG
MANUAL
DEPTH SHADING DISPLAY:
SHOW FROM: 7 ft EDIT
TO: 19 ft
DEPTH LINES & SPOT SOUNDINGS
DISPLAY MODES:
PLOTTER/OVERLAY
DEPTH LINES & SOUNDINGS DISP:
SHOW FROM: 00000 ft
TO: 01000 ft
ROCKS BOTTOM TYPE DEPTH DISPLAY:
SHOW FROM: 00000 ft
TO: 00030 ft
RETURN
DEPTH CONFIG menu
DEPTH CONFIG menu description

DEPTH SHADING CONFIGURATION: Choose the display color depending on depth.
Setting Description Default Setting

AUTO Displays the chart in 32-color specified by C-MAP.
Displays the chart with three colors, blue, light-blue
MANUAL and white. Areas for each color can be set at AUTO
DEPTH AREA SHADING DISPLAY.
NONE Turn off depth area display.
DEPTH SHADING DISPLAY: Set the depth boundaries for shallow-medium and medium-
deep depths when DEPTH SHADING CONFIRMATION is set to MANUAL. For example,
setting 18 ft and 60 ft will show depths up to 18 ft in white, depths from 18 to 60 ft in
light-blue and depths greater than 60 ft in blue. (Setting value: 7, 18, 30 and 60 m/ft/fa/pb,
Default setting: Shallow-Medium; 7, Medium-Deep; 30 ft)
7-20
DEPTH LINES & SPOT SOUNDINGS DISPLAY MODES: Choose where to display depth
contours, depth data, etc.
Setting Description Default Setting

PLOT/OVERLAY Shows depth lines and soundings on the plotter and
overlay displays.
PLOT/OVERLAY
PLOTTER Shows depth lines and soundings on the plotter display.
OFF Turns off depth lines and soundings.
DEPTH LINES & SPOT SOUNDINGS DISP: Choose the depth range at which to show
depth lines and soundings (depth contours, depth data, etc.)
Setting Setting Range Default Setting

SHOW FROM 0 m/ft/fa/pb
0-99999 m/ft/fa/pb
TO 1000 m/ft/fa/pb
ROCKS BOTTOM TYPE DEPTH DISPLAY: Choose range for rocks depth display.
Setting Setting Range Default Setting

SHOW FROM 0 m/ft/fa/pb
0-99999 m/ft/fa/pb
TO 30 m/ft/fa/pb
7-21
7.5 Data Boxes Setup

You may select the data to show in the data boxes for the plotter, radar and sounder
displays. Six boxes may be displayed in case of small size data box and two for large size
data box.
1. Display the radar, plotter or sounder display, whichever you want to set.
2. Press the MENU key to open the main menu.
3. Press one of the following sets of soft keys depending on the display selected at step 1.
Plotter mode: PLOTTER SETUP, D. BOX
Radar mode: RADAR DISPLAY SETUP, D. BOX
Sounder mode: SOUNDER MENU, D. BOX
X DATABOX SIZE DATA

SMALL BOX
POSITION ON
WAYPOINT OFF EDIT
COG ON
SOG ON
STW OFF
BEARING OFF
RANGE OFF
TIME TO GO OFF
ETA OFF
TEMPERATURE OFF
DEPTH OFF
TRIP LOG ON
DATE OFF
TIME OFF
RETURN
WIND OFF
HEADING OFF
AIR TEMPERATURE OFF
AIR PRESSURE OFF
Data box menu

4. Use the Cursor pad to select an item, then press the EDIT soft key.
5. Select ON or OFF as desired.
6. Press the ENTER soft key or the ENTER knob to register your selection. Six items may
be set to ON for small data boxes; two for large data boxes.
7. Repeat steps 4-6 to turn other items on or off.
7-22
7.6 Hot Page Setup

Six user-arrangeable hot pages are provided for quick selection of desired display. If the
default hot pages are not to your liking you may change them as shown below.
1. Press the MENU key followed by pressing the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM
SETUP, HOT PAGE & NAV DISP SETUP and HOT PAGE SETUP soft keys in that
order.
2. Use the Cursor pad to select the hot page number to set, then press the EDIT soft key.
The full-screen selection window appears.
HOT PAGE 1
RADAR PLOTTER SOUNDER
NAV DATA OVERLAY
Hot page setup menu

3. Rotate the ENTER knob to select the full-screen picture desired and push the ENTER
knob. A set of combination screens, corresponding to the full-screen selected, appears.
HOT PAGE 1
--
--
10 --
--
20
Combination screen selection window

4. Rotate the ENTER knob to select the full screen or combination screen desired and
push it to set.
7-23
7.7 Navigator Setup

This section provides the information necessary for selecting the type of navigator
connected to your plotter.
7.7.1 Navigation data source

The NAV SETUP menu mainly selects the source of nav data. For GPS receiver other than
a FURUNO BB GPS receiver, speed averaging and local time offset (to use local time) are
also available. Press the MENU key followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV
OPTION and NAV SOURCE SETTINGS soft keys to display this menu.
NAV NAV
POSITION SOURCE AIR TEMPERATURE SOURCE
SETUP1 FURUNO BB GPS SETUP2
ALL
SPEED(STW) SOURCE AIR PRESSURE SOURCE
ETR FURUNO BB GPS EDIT
TEMPERATURE SOURCE EDIT
ETR
DEPTH SOURCE
ETR
STW CALIBRATION
+00%
TEMP CALIBRATION
+00.0 F
DEPTH CALIBRATION
+00ft NEXT PREV.
WIND AVERAGING PAGE PAGE
001 seconds (s)
WIND DIRECTION OFFSET
S000.0
WIND SPEED CALIBRATION RETURN
+00%
WIND(MWV) SOURCE
FURUNO BB GPS
STW TEMP
30.0kt +41.3 F
DEPTH
50.0ft
WIND SPEED WIND DIR
--.-kt ---.-
Page 1 Page 2
7-24
Contents of nav setup menu

Position Chooses source of position data. FURUNO BB GPS: GPS receiver
Source GP-320B/330B, WS-200
GP: GPS navigator (via NETWORK
or NMEA port)
LC: Loran C navigator (via
NETWORK or NMEA port)
ALL: Multiple navaid connection (via
NETWORK or NMEA port)
Speed (STW) Chooses source of speed data. ETR (NavNet sounder), NMEA
Source
Temperature Chooses source of water temperature data. ETR, NMEA. Select ETR to show
Source water temperature data fed from the
network sounder.
Depth Chooses source of depth data. ETR (NavNet sounder), NMEA
Source
STW Calibrates NMEA speed data. Enter amount -50 to +50%
Calibration in percentage.
Temp Calibrates NMEA temperature data. Enter -20.0°C to +20.0°C (or equivalent
Calibration offset to correct NMEA temperature data. in °F)
Depth Calibrates NMEA depth data. Enter offset to -15.0 to +90.0 ft (or equivalent in m,
Calibration correct NMEA depth data. fa or P/B)
Wind Enter a value to smooth wind 1-600 s
Averaging speed/direction data. Ship’s bow is
referenced to smooth wind vector
movement.
Wind Offsets wind direction data. S180°-P180°
Direction
Offset
Wind Speed Offsets NMEA wind speed data. Enter -50 to +50%
Calibration amount in percentage.
Wind(MWV) Chooses source of wind data. Select FURUNO BB GPS; NMEA
Source FURUNO BB GPS to get wind data from
WS-200.
Air Chooses source of air temperature data. FURUNO BB GPS; NMEA
Temperature Select FURUNO BB GPS to get air
Source temperature data from WS-200.
Air Pressure Chooses source of air pressure data. Select FURUNO BB GPS; NMEA
Source FURUNO BB GPS to get air pressure data
from WS-200.
7-25
7.7.2 FURUNO BB GPS receiver setup

The GPS SETUP menu sets up a FURUNO BB GPS receiver. Press the MENU key
followed by the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and GPS SENSOR SETTINGS
soft keys to display this menu.
GPS
GEODETIC DATUM
WGS-84 SETUP
POSITION SMOOTHING
000 second(s) EDIT
SPD/CSE SMOOTHING
005 second(s)
LATITUDE OFFSET
0.000'N GPS
LONGITUDE OFFSET STATUS
0.000'E
DISABLE SATELLITE
__ __ __ WAAS
LATITUDE SETUP
38° 00.000' N
LONGITUDE
123° 00.000' E
ANTENNA HEIGHT
005 m
GPS FIX MODE
2D/3D
RETURN
COLD START
NO
GPS setup menu
Contents of GPS setup menu

Geodetic Datum Geodetic datum is a reference for geodetic See Appendix for full list.
survey measurements consisting of fixed
latitude, longitude and azimuth values
associated with a defined station of
reference. You must have the correct
geodetic datum selected in your plotter so
that it will reference the correct point on
the chart for a given latitude and longitude.
Although WGS-84 is now the world
standard, other categories of charts still
exist. Refer to Appendix for a full list of
geodetic datum.
7-26
Contents of GPS setup menu (con’t on previous page)

Position Smoothing When the DOP or receiving condition is 0-999 seconds
unfavorable, the GPS fix may change
greatly, even if the vessel is not moving.
This change can be reduced by smoothing
the raw GPS fixes. A setting between 000
to 999 is available. The higher the setting
the more smoothed the raw data. If the
setting is too high, the response time
required to show a change of latitude and
longitude will be too long. This is
especially noticeable if the vessel is
moving fast. Increase the setting if the
GPS fix changes randomly.
Spd/Cse Smoothing During position fixing, ship’s velocity 0-999 seconds
(speed and course) is directly measured
by receiving GPS satellite signals. The raw
velocity data may vary too much
depending on receiving conditions and
other factors. You can reduce this random
variance by increasing the smoothing. The
higher the smoothing setting, the more the
raw data will be averaged. If this setting is
high, the response to speed and course
changes will slow. For no smoothing, enter
all zeroes.
Latitude, Longitude Offsets latitude position to further refine 0.001’S – 9.999’S
Offset position accuracy. 0.000’N – 9.999’N
0.001’E – 9.999’E
0.000’W – 9.999’W
7-27
Contents of GPS setup menu (con’t on previous page)

Disable Satellite Every GPS satellite is broadcasting Max. 3 satellites
abnormal satellite number(s) in its
Almanac, which contains general orbital
data about all GPS satellites, including
those which are malfunctioning. Using this
information, the GPS receiver
automatically eliminates any
malfunctioning satellite from the GPS
satellite schedule. However, the Almanac
sometimes may not contain this
information. If you hear about a
malfunctioning satellite from another
source, you can disable it manually. Enter
satellite number (two digits, max. 3
satellites),then press the ENTER soft key.
Latitude Sets initial latitude position after cold start. —
Use the N < - -> S soft key to switch
coordinate.
Longitude Sets initial longitude position after cold —
start. Use the W < - -> E soft key to switch
coordinate.
Antenna Height Enters the height of the GPS antenna unit 0-999 m
above sea surface. For further details refer
to the installation manual.
GPS Fix Mode Chooses position fixing method: 2D (three 2D, 2D/3D
satellites in view), 2D/3D (three or four
satellites in view whichever is greater).
Cold Start Clears the Almanac to receive the latest No, Yes
Almanac.
GPS STATUS Displays GPS satellite status display.
(soft key) Requires FURUNO BB GPS receiver or
GPS navigator outputting the data
sentence GSA or GSV. For further details
see the chapter on Maintenance.
7-28
WAAS SETUP
Press the WAAS SETUP soft key to show the WAAS SETUP display.
Contents of WAAS SETUP menu

WAAS MODE Select ON to use the WAAS mode. On, Off
WAAS SEARCH WAAS satellite can be searched automatically Auto, Manual
or manually. For manual search, enter
appropriate WAAS satellite number.
WAAS ALARM When the WAAS signal is lost, the audible On, Off
alarm sounds with the visual message “NO
WAAS SIGNAL.”
On: Alarm continues to sound until the WAAS
positioning mode is available again or the alarm
is recognized by key operation.
Off: Alarm sounds three times.
CORRECTION Selects the type of message for WAAS 00 to 27, 99
DATA SET correction.
7.7.3 TD display setup

The TD SETUP menu sets which Loran C or Decca chain to use to display TD position.
(Connection of a Loran C or Decca navigator is not necessary to display TD position.)

2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and TD SETUP soft keys to
display the TD SETUP menu.
TD
LORAN-C
SETUP
GRI
9940:11-27 EDIT
U.S. WEST COAST
CORRECTION 1
+000.0 µs
CORRECTION 2
+000.0 µs
DECCA
CHAIN
01 R-G
S BALTIC
CORRECTION 1
+00.00 lane RETURN
CORRECTION 2
+00.00 lane
TD setup menu
7-29
Displaying Loran C TDs

1. Select GRI, then press the EDIT soft key to show the GRI & station pair window.
GRI & STATION PAIR
▲
9940 11-27
▼
U.S. WEST COAST
Loran GRI & station pair window

2. Adjust the Cursor pad upward or downward to select GRI code.
3. Roll the Cursor pad rightward to show the display below, to enable selection of station
pair.
GRI & STATION PAIR
▲
9940 11-27
▼
U.S. WEST COAST
Loran C GRI & station pair window

4. Adjust the Cursor pad vertically to select station pair.
5. Press the ENTER soft key to register your selection.
6. If necessary, you may enter a position offset to refine Loran C position accuracy. Select
(GRI) CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2, then press the EDIT soft key. Enter
correction value with the Cursor pad and ENTER knob. Use the + < − −> - soft key to
switch from plus to minus and vice versa. Press the ENTER soft key or push the ENTER
knob.
8. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the NEXT PAGE soft key.
9. Select “LORAN C” from “TD DISPLAY” and “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY.”
7-30
Displaying DECCA TDs

1. Select CHAIN, then press the EDIT soft key to show the chain & station pair window.
CHAIN STATION PAIR
▲
01 R-G
▼
▼
S BALTIC
Decca chain and station pair window

2. Adjust the Cursor pad upward or downward to select Decca chain number.
3. Roll the Cursor pad rightward to show the display below, to enable selection of station
pair.
CHAIN STATION PAIR
▲
01 R-G
▼
S BALTIC
Decca chain and station pair window

4. Adjust the Cursor pad upward or downward to select station pair (R: red, G: green and
P: purple).
5. Press the ENTER soft key to register your selection.
6. If necessary, you may enter position offset to refine Decca position. Select (CHAIN)
CORRECTION 1 or CORRECTION 2, then press the EDIT soft key. Enter correction
value with the Cursor pad and ENTER knob. Use the
+ < − −> - soft key to switch from plus to minus and vice versa. Press the ENTER soft key
or push the ENTER knob.
8. Press the GENERAL SETUP soft key followed by the NEXT PAGE soft key.
9. Select “DECCA” from “TD DISPLAY” and “TD” from “POSITION DISPLAY.”
7-31
7.8 Nav Data Display Setup

The nav data display shows various navigation data, fed from a navigator, network
equipment, etc. You may select the data to display and where to display it as follows:
1. Press the MENU key to open the main menu.

2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP, HOT PAGE & NAV DISP
SETUP and NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP soft keys.
NAV
DATA
1
POSITION
EDIT
2 3
WPT POS SOG
4 5
Positions STW COG
for full 6 7
screen BEARING RANGE
8 9
DEPTH TEMP
10 11 RETURN
LOG TRIP TTG
Positions 12
ETA
for half
screen 13 14
DATE TIME
Nav data setup screen

3. Use the Cursor pad to select a location.
4. Press the EDIT soft key. The following display appears.
DISPLAY DATA
¤ POSITION
¡ WPT POSITION
¡ SOG
¡ STW
¡ COG
¡ BEARING
¡ RANGE
¡ DEPTH
¡ TEMPERATURE
¡ TRIP LOG
¡ TIME TO GO
¡ ETA
¡ DATE
¡ TIME
¡ WIND
Nav data setup window

5. Select the data to display, then press the ENTER soft key or ENTER knob to register
your selection.
7-32
7.9 Sounder Setup

This section shows you how to customize your network sounder to your liking. You can set
fish alarm sensitivity, fine tune sensors, etc.
7.9.1 System setup

1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key.
2. Press the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
FISH ALARM LEVEL SYSTEM SYSTEM

STC-HF
SETUP1 SETUP2
MEDIUM 00
TRANSMISSION STC-LF
ON EDIT 00 EDIT
TVG-HF FREQ. ADJ.-HF
5 +00.0 %
TVG-LF SENSOR FREQ.ADJ.-LF SENSOR
5 SETUP +00.0 % SETUP
ECHO OFFSET-HF TARGET ECHO
+00 NORMAL
ECHO OFFSET-LF
+00
BOTTOM LEVEL-HF
+000 NEXT
BOTTOM LEVEL-LF PAGE
+000
KP PULSE PREV.
INTERNAL RETURN
PAGE
SMOOTHING
OFF
TLL OUTPUT
ON
Page 1 Page 2 (ETR-30 only)
Sounder system setup menu
7-33
Sounder system setup menu description

Fish Alarm Sets the fish alarm sensitivity; that is, High: Orange and stronger echoes
Level the minimum echo strength which will trigger the alarm.*
trigger the fish alarms. Medium: Yellow and stronger echoes
trigger the alarm.*
Low: Green and stronger echoes
trigger the alarm.*
* = 8-color display
Transmission Turns TX power on/off. On, Off
TVG TVG (Time Varied Gain) compensates 0-9
(HF,LF) for propagation attenuation of the
ultrasonic waves. It does this by
equalizing echo presentation so that
fish schools of the same size appear in
the same density in both shallow and
deep waters. In addition, it reduces
surface noise. Note that if the TVG
level is set too high short range
echoes may not be displayed.
Echo Offset If the on-screen echo level appears to -50 - +50
(HF, LF) be too weak or too strong and the
level cannot be adjusted satisfactorily
with the gain control, adjust echo
offset to compensate for too weak or
too strong echoes.
Bottom Level If the depth indication is unstable in -100 - +100
(HF, LF) automatic operation or the bottom
echo cannot be displayed in
reddish-brown by adjusting the gain
control in manual operation, you may
adjust the bottom echo level detection
circuit, for both HF and LF, to stabilize
the indication. Note that if the level is
set too low weak echoes may be
missed and if set too high the depth
indication will not be displayed.
KP Pulse Internal, External (See installation
Selects source of keying pulse.
manual.)
Smoothing Smoothes echoes to present stable SM1-SM4, OFF
display. The higher the setting the
greater the smoothing.
TLL Output Outputs current position to plotter ON, OFF
where it is marked with TLL mark. Use
soft key to output TLL.
7-34
Sounder system setup menu description (con’t from previous page, for ETR-30)

STC (HF, LF) Adjusts STC level for the high and low 0-10
(For ETR-30N frequencies, and is useful for
only) suppressing surface noise. The
setting range is 0-10; the higher the
setting the greater the extent of
suppression. Setting 10 suppresses
noise up to several meters. Turn off
the STC when there is no noise on the
screen, otherwise weak echoes may
be missed.
FREQ. ADJ. Interference from other acoustic -10 - +10 %
(HF, LF) (For equipment operating nearby or other
ETR-30N electronic equipment on your boat
only) may show itself on the display. You
may suppress these type of
interference by adjusting frequency.
TARGET Sets fishing objective. Normal, Surface
ECHO Normal for general fishing, Surface for
(For ETR-30N detecting surface. Pulse repetition
only) rate is higher than NORMAL on the
specified transducer.
SENSOR Offsets speed, depth and water See next section for details.
SETUP temperature indications and speed of
soft key sound.
(See next
page.)
7-35
7.9.2 Sensor setup

The SENSOR SETUP menu lets you further refine speed, water temperature and depth
data fed from the network sounder.
1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key.

2. Press the SOUNDER SYSTEM SETUP and SENSOR SETUP soft keys to show the
SENSOR SETUP menu. The current ship’s speed, water temperature, depth and speed
of sound are shown at the bottom of the menu.
SENSOR
SPEED CALIBRATION SETUP
+ 00%
TEMP. CALIBRATION EDIT
+ 00°F
DEPTH CALIBRATION
+00ft
ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION
+ 000m/s
RETURN
SPEED TEMP
12.3kt 78.8°F
DEPTH ACSTC SPD
125.0ft 1500m/s
Sensor setup menu

3. Select item to adjust, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Adjust the Cursor pad upward or downward to set appropriate value.
Speed and temperature calibrations: Enter plus or minus value. For example, if the
water temperature readout is 77°F but the actual water temperature is 75°F, enter
–2(°F).
Depth calibration: If you desire the depth readout to show the distance between ship’s
draft and bottom (rather than transducer and bottom), set ship’s draft here. Enter a plus
or minus value.
Acoustic speed calibration: Sets the speed of sound used by the network sounder.
Normally no adjustment is required, however if echoes are returning too slow or too fast
adjust the value as appropriate. This is only used if water salinity is at an extreme level.
Under normal circumstances, do not adjust.
Sensor setup menu settings
Item Settings Default Setting

Speed Calibration -50 - +50% 0 (no offset)
Temperature Calibration -20°C - +20°C* 0 (no offset)
Depth Calibration -15 - +90 ft 0 (no offset)
Acoustic Speed Calibration -500 - +500 m/s 0 (no offset)
*: -36°C to +36°C if temperature unit setting on the GENERAL SETUP
menu is different between multiple Navnet units.
5. Press the RETURN soft key followed by the MENU key.
7-36
7.9.3 Sounding range, zoom range, bottom lock range

This paragraph shows you how to set custom ranges for basic range, zoom range (marker
and bottom zoom) and bottom lock range. All default basic ranges are restored whenever
the unit of depth measurement is changed. Therefore, change the depth unit before
changing the basic ranges.
1. Show the sounder display, then press the MENU key to open the main menu.
2. Press the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP soft key to show the SOUNDER RANGE SETUP
menu.
RANGE
RANGE 1
SETUP
15 ft
RANGE 2
EDIT
30 ft
RANGE 3
60 ft
RANGE 4
120 ft
RANGE 5
200 ft
RANGE 6
400 ft
RANGE 7
1000 ft
RANGE 8
4000 ft RETURN
ZOOM RANGE
10 ft
BOTTOM LOCK RANGE
10 ft
Sounder range setup menu

3. Select the range to change, then press the EDIT soft key.
4. Rotate the Cursor pad or ENTER knob to set range desired, then press the RETURN
soft key. For basic range, set depth from lowest to highest; a range cannot be higher
than its succeeding neighbor.
5. Press the MENU key to finish.
Default basic ranges
Range 1 Range2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 Range 6 Range 7 Range 8

ETR-6/10N ETR-30N
5m 10 m 20 m 40 m 80 m 150 m 300 m 1200 m 1500 m
Zoom range and bottom-lock ranges
Item Settings Default Setting

Zoom Range 2 m – 120 m, 7 ft – 400 ft, 10 m, 30 ft, 10 fa, 10 P/B
1 fa – 60 fa, 1 P/B – 700 P/B
Bottom-lock 3 or 6 m, 10 or 20 ft, 2 or 3 6 m, 20 ft, 3 fa, 3 P/B
Range fa, 2 or 3 P/B
7-37

The function keys provide one-touch execution of a desired function. The default sounder
Function Key Default Function Function Key Label

1 Output current position. TLL
2 Suppress clutter. CLT
3 Erase weak signal. SLV
4 Suppress noise. NL
5 Set picture advancement speed. PA
1. Show the sounder display.

FUNC
Function key KEY
▲
SOFT KEY 1
setting TLL: TLL OUTPUT
EDIT
Function T
L
key label SOFT KEY 2 L
CLT: CLUTTER
C
L
SOFT KEY 3 T
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL

S
L
SOFT KEY 4 V
NL: NOISE LEVEL
N
SOFT KEY 5 L
PA: PICTURE ADV
RETURN
P
A
Sounder function key menu

4. Select the function key you want to program, then press the EDIT soft key.
SOFT KEY 1 SOFT KEY 1 SOFT KEY 1
▲
▲
OFF PA: PICTURE ADV SSR: SNDR SOURCE

MOD: AUTO MODE TG: TEMP. GRAPH DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF
Scroll Scroll
GHF: GAIN - HF TVH: TVG - HF CHG: CHANGE CNTRL
down down
GLF: GAIN - LF TVL: TVG - LF SAV: SAVE SCREEN
SFT: SHIFT EOH: OFFSET - HF QP: QUICK POINT
NL: NOISE LIMITER EOL: OFFSET - LF MRK: MARK ENTRY
CLT: CLUTTER SMT: SMOOTHING
WMK: WHITE MARKER ZMR: ZOOM RANGE
HUE: HUE BLR: B/L RANGE
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL TLL: TLL OUTPUT
▲
7-38
Sounder function keys
Menu Item Function Function Key Label

OFF Assigns no function.
MOD: AUTO MODE Display automatic mode selection window. MOD
GHF: GAIN – HF Displays high frequency gain adjustment window. GHF
GLF: GAIN – LF Displays low frequency gain adjustment window. GLF
SFT: SHIFT Shifts range in manual operation. SFT
NL: NOISE LIMITER Suppresses noise. NL
CLT: CLUTTER Suppresses clutter. CLT
WMK: WHITE MARKER Sets white marker. WMK
HUE: HUE Sets hue. HUE
SLV: SIGNAL LEVEL Erases weak signals. SLV
PA: PICTURE ADV Sets picture advance speed. PA
TG: TEMP. GRAPH Turns temperature graph on/off. TG
TVH: TVG – HF Sets TVG for high frequency TVH
TVL: TVG – LF Sets TVG for low frequency. TVL
EOH: OFFSET – HF Offsets echo strength for high frequency. EOH
EOL: OFFSET -LF Offsets echo strength for low frequency. EOL
SMT: SMOOTHING Sets echo smoothing rate. SMT
ZMR: ZOOM RANGE Sets zoom range. ZMR
BLR: B/L RANGE Sets bottom lock range for bottom-lock display. BLR
Outputs current position to plotter. Also inscribes line
TLL: TLL OUTPUT on sounder and registers position as a waypoint on TLL
plotter.
SSR: SNDR SOURCE Selects source for sounder data. SSR
DBX: D. BOX ON/OFF Turns data boxes on/off. DBX
CHG: CHANGE CNTRL Switches control in combination display. CHG
SAV: SAVE SCREEN Saves sounder picture to SD card. SAV
QP: QUICK POINT Quick point function. QP
Note: To use CHANGE CNTRL, set it on all displays, with the same soft key number.
7-39
7.10 Nav Graphic Display Setup

The nav graphic display (see paragraph 3.1.2) shows either the compass display or the
wind angle display, together with depth and temperature graphs. You may choose which to
display and setup the depth and temperature graphs as follows:

2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, SYSTEM SETUP, HOT PAGE & NAV DISP
SETUP and NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP soft keys.
NAV
GRAPHIC METER COMPASS GRAPHIC
DEPTH GRAPH UP~DATE 1S/DOT
TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE 1S/DOT EDIT
RETURN
NAV GRAPHIC menu

3. Choose GRAPHIC METER and press the EDIT key.
GRAPHIC METER
▲
¤ COMPASS
¡ WIND ANGLE
▼
Graphic meter window

4. Choose COMPASS or WIND ANGLE as appropriate and press the ENTER soft key.
5. Choose DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE and press the EDIT soft key.
DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE

▲
¤ 0.5s./dot
¡ 1s/dot
¡ 2s/dot
¡ 4s/dot
▼
Depth graph up-date window

6. Choose desired update period/number of dots and press the ENTER soft key.
7. Set TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE similarly.
7-40
8. MAINTENANCE,
TROUBLESHOOTING
This chapter provides information necessary for keeping your unit in good working order
and remedying simple problems.
WARNING NOTE
Do not open the equipment. Do not apply paint, anti-corrosive sealant
or contact spray to coating or plastic
Hazardous voltage which can parts of the equipment.
cause electrical shock exists
inside the equipment. Only Those items contain organic solvents that
qualified personnel should can damage coating and plastic parts,
work inside the equipment. especially plastic connectors.
8.1 Preventive Maintenance

Regular maintenance is important for optimum performance. A maintenance program
should be established and should at least include the items shown in the table below.
Maintenance program
Item Check point Remedy

Display unit connectors Check for tight connection. Tighten loosened connectors.
LCD The LCD will, in time, Wipe the LCD carefully to prevent
accumulate a coating of dust scratching, using tissue paper and an
which tends to dim the picture. LCD cleaner. To remove dirt or salt
Wipe LCD lightly with soft deposits, use an LCD cleaner, wiping
cloth to remove dust. slowly with tissue paper so as to
dissolve the dirt or salt. Change paper
frequently so the salt or dirt will not
scratch the LCD. Do not use solvents
such as thinner, acetone or benzene
for cleaning.
Ground terminal Check for tight connection and Clean or replace ground wire as
corrosion. necessary.
8-1
8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING
8.2 Replacement of Batteries

Battery on circuit board
A lithium battery (Type CR2450-F2 ST2L, Code No. 000-144-941) fitted on a circuit board
inside the display unit preserves data when the equipment is turned off, and its life is about
three years. When its voltage is low the battery icon ( ) appears at the top of the display.
When the icon appears, contact your dealer to request replacement of the battery.
Batteries in remote controller

The remote controller has two AA batteries. If the distance from which the remote controller
can be operated has decreased, change the battery.
Note: Replace all batteries together. Do not mix old and new batteries.
WARNING
Ensure battery polarity is correct.
Wrong polarity may cause the batteries to

explode.
8.3 Replacement of Fuse

The fuse on the power cable protects the equipment from reverse polarity of the
ship’s mains and equipment fault. If the fuse blows, find out the cause before
replacing it. Use the correct fuse¥. Using the wrong fuse will damage the
equipment and void the warranty.
1724C, 1734C: 10A for 12V device, 5A for 24V device

GD-1720C: 5A for 12 V device, 3A for 24 VDC device
WARNING
Use the proper fuse.
Use of a wrong fuse can result in damage

to the equipment or cause fire.
8-2
8.4 Replacing the Magnetron

When the magnetron has expired, distant targets cannot be seen on the display. When you
feel that long range performance has decreased, contact a FURUNO agent or dealer about
replacement of the magnetron.
Radar model and magnetron used

Model Magnetron Type Code No.
MODEL 1724C E3588 000-146-866
MODEL 1734C E3571 000-146-867
8.5 Simple Troubleshooting

This section provides simple troubleshooting procedures which the user can
follow to restore normal operation. If you cannot restore normal operation do not
attempt to check inside the unit. Any trouble should be referred to a qualified
technician.
8.5.1 General
General troubleshooting
If… Then…
you cannot turn on the • check for blown fuse.
power • check that the power connector is firmly fastened.
• check for corrosion on the power cable connector.
• check for damaged power cable.
• check battery for proper voltage output (10.8 to 31.2 V).
there is no response • turn off and on the power. If there still is no response the key may
when a key is pressed be faulty. Request service.
8-3
8.5.2 Radar
GD-1720C requires a network radar.
Radar troubleshooting
If… But… Then…

you pressed the nothing appears on the • check that the antenna cable is firmly
POWER/BRILL key and the display fastened.
RADAR TX soft key to show • check if radar source is correct.
the radar picture
marks, legends appear no echo appears • check that the antenna cable is firmly
fastened.
the picture is not updated or — • check antenna cable.
it freezes • for freeze up, turn the display unit on and
off again.
tuning is adjusted sensitivity is poor • magnetron may need to be replaced.
Contact your dealer.
the range is changed radar picture does not • try to hit the [+] and [-] keys again.
change • turn the display unit off and on again.
there is poor discrimination in — • adjust A/C SEA.
range
the true motion presentation — • reselect true motion mode.
is not working properly • check if heading and speed are input.
the range rings are not — • hit the RADAR DISPLY and RINGS soft
displayed keys to display them.
8.5.3 Plotter
Requires a FURUNO BB GPS receiver.
Plotter troubleshooting
If… Then…
position is not fixed within • check that antenna connector is firmly fastened.
three minutes • check number of satellites received, on the GPS status display. (See
page 8-11.) There should be three or more.
position is wrong • check that the correct geodetic chart system is selected, on the GPS
SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
• enter position offset, on the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
the track is not plotted • track is not being plotted. (“H” icon appears at the top of the display.)
Press the TRACK HALT soft key on the TRACKS & MARKS CONTROL
menu to start plotting again.
the bearing is wrong • check that correct magnetic variation is entered, on the GENERAL
SETUP menu.
Loran C (or Decca) TDs do • check that LORAN C (or DECCA) is selected at TD DISPLAY on the
not appear GENERAL SETUP menu. Also, check that proper Loran C (Decca) chains
codes are entered, on the TD SETUP menu.
Loran C (or Decca) TDs • enter TD offset, on the TD SETUP menu.
are wrong
the ship’s speed indication • try to decrease speed/course smoothing, on the GPS SENSOR
is not zero after the ship is SETTINGS menu.
stopped
8-4
8.5.4 Sounder
Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N/30N.
Sounder troubleshooting
If… But… Then…

you selected a sounder picture does not appear • check that the network
display with the DISP key sounder’s signal cable is firmly
fastened.
• Check that sounder source is
correct.
• check that the network sounder
is plugged in. The LED on the
network sounder should flash
every second.
marks and characters picture does not appear • check for loosened transducer
appear connector.
the picture appears zero line does not appear • the picture is shifted. Confirm
shift setting.
picture sensitivity is too low — • check gain setting, if using
manual operation.
• marine life or air bubbles may
be clinging to transducer face.
• bottom may be too soft to
return a suitable echo.
the depth indication is not — • adjust gain and range to display
displayed the bottom echo (in reddish
brown), if you are using the
manual sounder mode.
noise or interference shows — • check to be sure the transducer
on the display cable is not near ship’s engine.
• check the ground.
• other video sounders of the
same frequency as yours may
be operating near you.
the water temperature graph data is wrong • check that sensor cable is
appears tightly fastened.
8-5
8.6 Diagnostics
This paragraph provides the procedures for testing the equipment for proper operation.
Four tests are provided: Memory I/O test, Keyboard test, Remote controller test, and Test
pattern.
8.6.1 Memory I/O test

The memory I/O test provides for individual testing of the display unit, FURUNO BB GPS
Receiver, Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N and ARP, displaying program number
and checking for proper operation.

3. Press the SYSTEM SETUP soft key.
4. Press the TEST & CLEAR soft key.
5. Press the MEMORY I/O TEST soft key.
MEMORY
I/O TST
DISPLAY UNIT TEST
GPS SENSOR TEST*
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**
RETURN
* = Requires a FURUNO BB GPS receiver.

** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N.
MEMORY I/O TEST menu

1. Then, press appropriate soft key to start a diagnostic test.
8-6
Display unit test

Press the DISPLAY UNIT TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test the
display unit. The equipment displays program version number and checks devices. Results
for device checks are shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service. A test
connector is required to check ports. “ - - “ shown when no test connector is connected.
Chart number shown when chart is inserted. Press the RETURN soft key to return the
MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
*For Navioics type. 1950028XX for C-MAP.

PROGRAM No. 1950027XX*
ROM1 : OK
ROM2 : OK 02
SDRAM : OK
SRAM : OK
INT. BATTERY : OK
PORT
NMEA IN/OUT : --
NMEA IN : --
RS232 : --
HEADING : --
NETWORK : --
CARD SLOT :
FPGA No. : 01.02
H. PULSE : OK No results appear when
B. PULSE : OK "sub" radar selected as
ON TIME : 000000.0 h radar source.
TX TIME : 000000.0 h
Machine Status +108
XX = Program Version No.
Display unit test results
GPS sensor test (Requires a FURUNO BB GPS receiver)

Press the GPS SENSOR TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test a
FURUNO BB GPS receiver. The equipment displays GPS receiver program version number,
and checks the GPS unit for proper operation, displaying OK or NG (No Good) as the result.
For NG, request service. Press the RETURN soft key to return the MEMORY I/O TEST
menu.
PROGRAM No. *XXXXXXXXXX
GPS UNIT : OK
Machine Status +115

*: Program No.
GPS receiver test results
8-7
Network sounder test (Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N)

Press the NETWORK SOUNDER TEST soft key at the MEMORY I/O TEST menu to test
the Network Sounder ETR-6/10N or ETR-30N. The equipment displays network sounder
program version number, checks the ROM and RAM, and displays water temperature
(appropriate sensor required) and depth. The results of the ROM and RAM check are
shown as OK or NG (No Good). For any NG, request service. Press the RETURN soft key
to return to the MEMORY I/O TEST menu.
PROGRAM No. 02523060XX

ROM 1 : OK
RAM : OK
TEMPERATURE
: 77°F
DEPTH
: 4000ft
Machine Status +115
XX = Program Version No.
ETR-30N: 0252310XX.XX
Network sounder test results
8.6.2 Test pattern

The test pattern test checks the display for proper display of colors.

5. Press the TEST PATTERN soft key to show the test pattern.
6. Push the ENTER knob consecutively to show white, red, green, blue and black colors
individually.
8-8
BLACK
BLUE
GREEN
GREEN
RED RETURN
WHITE
WHITE
PUSH ENTER KNOB TO CHANGE
RETURNPATTERN.
[ENTER] knob
WHT
[ENTER] knob
RED
[ENTER] knob
GRN
[ENTER] knob
BLU
[ENTER] knob
BLK
[ENTER] knob
Test pattern sequence
8-9
8.6.3 Keyboard, remote controller test

The keyboard test checks the controls on the display unit and remote controller for proper
operation.

5. Press the KEYBOARD & REMOTE TEST soft key.
PUSH "CLEAR" KEY

K-BOARD
3 TIMES TO RETURN TEST
For Remote Controller For Display Unit
I/R REMOTE CODE
Screen for testing keyboard, remote controller

6. Operate each control on the keyboard and remote controller one by one. A key is
functioning properly if its on-screen location “fills” in black when the key is pressed. For
the ENTER knob and Trackball, rotate them to show their X-Y positions digitally, and
push the ENTER knob to confirm its function.
7. Press the CLEAR key three times on the display unit or remote controller to escape
from the test.
8-10
8.7 GPS Status Display

The GPS status display provides data about the GPS satellites. It is available with
connection of the FURUNO BB GPS receiver or another GPS receiver outputting the data
sentence GSA or GSV.

2. Press the SYSTEM CONFIGURATION, NAV OPTION and GPS SENSOR SETTINGS
soft keys to display the GPS SENSOR SETTINGS menu.
3. Press the GPS STATUS soft key.
WAAS satellite (W)
23:59:59 Date
N FEB 27 2005
12 21 GPS 3D GPS fix state

W 26
DOP
23 20
1.2 DOP value
W 29 30
28 E
05 ALT
01
27 17
22 m GPS antenna height
S
SAT
No. 30 SNR
40 50
23
12 RX signal level table
29 Bars show satellite
27
01 signal levels. Satellites
17 RETURN
26 whose signal level
05 extends past 40 are
20
21 used to fix position.
30
28
123 WAAS satellite
Satellite position diagram

Satellites used for fixing position are circled.
GPS status display

4. Press the RETURN soft key to quit the GPS status display.
About the GPS status display
• This display is available with a FURUNO BB GPS receiver or other GPS receiver
connected via LAN and outputting NMEA 0183 data.
• The receive signal level table shows the receive signal strength of 12 GPS satellites and
one WAAS satellite. (GSA, GSV sentence necessary for GP-330B, WS-200 and other
GPS receiver.)
• The WAAS satellite whose GSA data is first received, in case of the GP-330B, WS-200
and other GPS receiver, is used for the display. When there is no GSA sentence and the
GSV sentence contains data from several WAAS satellites, the WAAS satellite having
the highest elevation and best SNR is used for the display.
• The satellite position diagram shows the arrangement of GPS, GLONASS and WAAS
satellites in the sky. A total of 36 satellites can be displayed. The type of satellite and
number of satellites that can be displayed are as follows:
GPS, 1-36; GLONASS, 65-96, WAAS, 1
• ALT indication is only available with GP-320B.
8-11
8.8 Clearing Memories

Your equipment has a memory for each of the plotter, radar and sounder sections. These
memories can be cleared to restart operation with default settings.
The following data are not cleared:
Radar: Heading adjustment, timing adjustment, MBS level, tuning point, tuning indication
(short, medium, long), video level, dead sector, antenna height, STC curve, antenna type,
on time, tx time, Sounder: White marker, hue, signal level, TLL output, depth calibration,
range.

5. Press the MEMORY CLEAR soft key.
MEMORY
DISPLAY UNIT CLEAR
NO
GPS SENSOR EDIT
NO
NETWORK SOUNDER
NO
RETURN
Memory clear menu

6. Use the Trackball to choose the memory to clear.
8. Use the Trackball to select YES, then press the ENTER soft key. One of the following
displays appears depending on the selection made at step 6.
ALL SETTNGS EXCEPT BEGIN COLD START SOUNDER WILL BE
SNDR ARE RESET TO TO CLEAR GPS SET TO DEFAULT.
DEFAULT. ARE YOU SURE? MEMORY. ARE YOU SURE? ARE YOU SURE?
YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB YES ... PUSH ENTER KNOB
NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY NO ... PUSH CLEAR KEY
Display Unit Clear GPS Receiver Clear Network Sounder Clear
Windows for clearing memory

9. Push the ENTER knob to clear the memory selected.
11. Turn the power off and on again.
8-12
Note: Though the message “SYSTEM HAS FAILED START UP TEST. PLEASE
CONTACT A LOCAL FURUNO REPRESENTATIVE FOR REPAIR. PUSH ANY KEY TO
CONTINUE” may appear when powering on the display unit immediately after the clearing
memories, there is no problem in fact. Press any key to continue the operation.
8.9 Error Messages

In addition to alarm messages your equipment also displays error messages.
Error messages
Error Message Meaning Remedy

General
Network sounder disconnected. • Check that display unit
where the sounder is
Connection with the ETR was
connected is turned on.
cut.
• Check network sounder’s
cabling.
Radar disconnected. • Check that display unit
Connection with the RADAR where the radar is
was cut. connected is turned on.
• Check antenna cable.
Voltage of battery on circuit Have a qualified technician
Low Voltage! Internal Battery
board in display unit is low. replace the battery.
No bearing pulse from radar Check antenna cable.
No bearing pulse detected.
antenna.
No position data is present. Check for obstacles around
No position data
GPS antenna.
Disconnect GPS cable from
Possible problem with FURUNO
No GPS fix! the display unit, and then
BB GPS receiver.
contact your dealer.
No heading pulse detected. Check heading sensor.
No heading pulse
HEADING DATA MISSING! Check heading cable.
8-13
8-14
APPENDIX
Menu Overview
Radar
MENU Key RADAR EBL REFERENCE (TRUE, RELATIVE)

DISPLAY CURSOR POSITION (LAT/LON, TD, RNG&BRG-REL, RNG&BRG-TRUE, MGRS)
SETUP TUNING (AUTO, MAN)
TX SECTOR BLANKING (ON (FROM 000°, SECTOR 001°), OFF)
NOISE REJECTION (OFF, LOW, HIGH)
BACKGROUND COLOR (BLACK/GREEN, BLACK/RED, BLUE/WHITE,
DK BLUE/WHITE, WHITE/GREEN)
ECHO COLOR (YELLOW, GREEN, MULTI-COLOR)
WATCHMAN TIME (5, 10, 20 minutes)
RANGE UNIT (nm, km, sm)
D. BOX soft key
(DATABOX SIZE SMALL/LARGE, POSITION, WAYPOINT, COG, SOG, STW,
BEARING, RANGE, TIME TO GO, ETA, TEMPERATURE, DEPTH, TRIP LOG,
DATE, TIME, WIND, HEADING, AIR TEMPERATURE, AIR PRESSURE)
Max. range:
24 nm/sm, km = Radar source is
RADAR 0.125/0.25/0.5/0.75/1/1.5/2/3/4/ 1824C/1724C/1734C.
RANGE 6/8/12/16/24/36/48/64/72 (nm & sm) 36 nm/sm, km = Radar source is 1834C.
SETUP# 0.25/0.5/0.75/1/1.5/2/3/4/6/8/ 48 nm/sm, km = Radar source is 1934C.
64 nm/sm, km = Radar source is 1944C.
12/16/24/36/48/64/72 (km)
72 nm/sm, km = Radar source is 1954C,
# = Not used on GD-1720C. 1964C.
ARP SETUP ARP TARGET INFO (INTERNAL ARP, EXTERNAL ARP, OFF)
(Requires ARP CANCEL ALL TARGETS (YES, NO)
circuit board in ARP VECTOR MODE (RELATIVE, TRUE)
network radar
ARP VECTOR TIME (30 seconds; 1, 3, 6, 15, 30 minutes)
18X4C/19X4C.)
HISTORY INTERVAL (OFF, 30 seconds; 1, 3, 6 minutes)
CPA (OFF, 0.5, 1, 2, 3, 5, 6 nm)
TCPA (30 seconds; 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 12 minutes)
AUTO ACQUISITION AREA (ON, OFF)
TARGET ID NUMBER (ON, OFF)
FUNCTION SOFT KEY 1 - SOFT KEY 5

KEY SETUP* (OFF, HDG LINE OFF, MODE, GAIN, A/C SEA, A/C RAIN, FTC
1 (Model 17X4C series radar only), ECHO STRETCH, PULSE
LENGTH, ZOOM, OFFCENTER, ECHO TRAIL, RINGS ON/OFF,
TLL OUTPUT, GUARD ALARM, EBL, VRM, TTM ON/OFF, WPT
ON/OFF, WATCHMAN, ACQUISITION (ARP-equipped Model
18X4C/19X4C series network radar only), STBY/TX, RADAR
SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL, QUICK POINT,
MARK ENTRY)
* Default settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, HDG LINE OFF; SOFT KEY 2, RINGS ON/OFF; SOFT KEY 3, ECHO TRAIL;
SOFT KEY 4, OFFCENTER, SOFT KEY 5, STBY/TX
AP-1
APPENDIX
1
SYSTEM GENERAL KEY BEEP (ON, OFF)
CONFIGURATION SETUP LANGUAGE (ENGLISH, OTHERS)
RANGE UNIT
Page 1 (nm, kt; km, km/h; sm, mph; nm&yd, kt; nm&m, kt; km&m, km/h; sm&yd, mph)
TEMPERATURE UNIT (°C, °F)
DEPTH UNIT (m, ft, fa, PB)
WIND UNIT (kt, km/h, MPH, m/s)
WIND DATA (APPARENT, TRUE)
SPEED AVERAGING (0-9999 seconds)
LOCAL TIME OFFSET (-13:30 - +13:30)
RESET TRIP LOG (YES, NO)
TIMEOUT DISPLAY SETTING (15, 30, 60 seconds, CONTINUE)
SAVE MOB KEY FUNCTION (SAVE SHIP POSITION & MOB,
MOB WITHOUT CONFIRMATION, QUICK POINT FUNCTION)
WALLPAPER (DEFAULT, USER)
Page 2 LAT/LON DISPLAY
(DD° MM. MM'
DD° MM. MMM'
DD° MM. MMMM'
DD° MM' SS.S")
TD DISPLAY (LORAN C, DECCA)
SPEED (SOG, STW)
POSITION DISPLAY (LAT/LON, TD, MGRS)
TIME DISPLAY (12 HOURS, 24 HOURS)
INFRARED REMOTE MODE (A, B, C, D)
RANGE & BEARING MODE
(GREAT CIRCLE, RHUMB LINE)
BEARING READOUT (TRUE, MAGNETIC)
MAGNETIC VARIATION (AUTO, MANUAL)
AIR PRESSURE UNIT (hPa, mbar, mmHg, inHg)
NAV NAV POSITION SOURCE
OPTION SOURCE (FURUNO BB GPS, GP, LC, ALL)
SETTINGS SPEED(STW) SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
TEMPERATURE SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
DEPTH SOURCE (ETR, NMEA)
STW CALIBRATION (-50 - +50%)
TEMP CALIBRATION (-40° - +40°F)
DEPTH CALIBRATION (-15 - +90 ft)
WIND AVERAGING (1 - 600 seconds)
WIND DIRECTION OFFSET (S(P)0° - 180°)
WIND SPEED CALIBRATION (-50 - +50%)
WIND(MWV) SOURCE (FURUNO BB GPS, NMEA)
AIR TEMPERATURE SOURCE (FURUNO BB GPS, NMEA)
AIR PRESSURE SOURCE (FURUNO BB GPS, NMEA)
GPS GEODETIC DATUM (WGS-84, OTHERS: See page AP-10.)

SENSOR POSITION SMOOTHING (0 - 999 seconds)
SETTINGS SPD/CSE SMOOTHING (0 - 999 seconds)
OPTION LATITUDE OFFSET (0.000 - 9.999'N(S))
LONGITUDE OFFSET (0.000 - 9.999'W(E))
DISABLE SATELLITE (Max. 3)
LATITUDE (45°35.000'N)
LONGITUDE (125°00.000'W)
ANTENNA HEIGHT (0 - 999 m)
GPS FIX MODE (2D, 2D/3D)
COLD START (YES, NO)
GPS STATUS soft key WAAS MODE (ON, OFF)

(Displays status of GPS satellites.) WAAS SEARCH (AUTO, MANUAL)
WAAS ALARM (ON, OFF)
WAAS SETUP soft key CORRECTIONS DATA SET
(For FURUNO BB GPS receiver)
TD SETUP LORAN-C GRI (all Loran C GRIs)

CORRECTION 1 (-999.9 - +999.9 μs)
CORRECTION 2 (-999.9 - +999.9 μs)
DECCA CHAIN (all Decca chains)
2 CORRECTION 1 (-99.99 - +99.99 lane)
CORRECTION 2 (-99.99 - +99.99 lane)
AP-2
APPENDIX
SYSTEM PORT DATA 1: OUTPUT FORMAT

SETUP SETUP GPS/NMEA (NMEA 0183 Ver.1.5, 2.0)
PORT BAUD RATE
(AUTO, 4800bps, 38400bps)
LAT/LON FORMAT
(DD° MM. MM'
DD° MM. MMM'
DD° MM. MMMM')
XTE FORMAT (X.XX, X.XXX)
OUTPUT DESTINATION
(YES, NO)
SELECT SNTNC soft key*
PORT MNITR soft key* CLEAR WINDOW
DATA 3: NMEA OUTPUT FORMAT

PC/NMEA/ (NMEA Ver.1.5, 2.0)
EXT. BUZZ BAUD RATE
PORT (4800, 9600, 19200 bps)
BIT LENGTH (7 bits, 8 bits)
STOP BIT (1 bit, 2 bits)
PARITY
(EVEN, ODD, NONE)
SELECT SNTNC soft key*
4 3
PORT MNITR soft key* CLEAR WINDOW
OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK

(Select data sentences to output to NavNet
equipment. See * below. All sentences turned off in default setting.)
* = AAM, APB, BOD, BWR(BWC)#1, DPT(DBT)#2, GGA, GLL, GTD,

MTW, RMA, RMB, RMC, VHW, VTG, WPL, XTE, ZDA, HDT, HDG, MWV, ZTG, TTM
(except in case of OUTPUT THROUGH NETWORK)
#1= BWR for rhumb line, BWC for great circle

#2 = DBT for NMEA Ver. 1.5; DPT for NMEA Ver. 2.0
AP-3
APPENDIX
4 3
TEST & MEMORY DISPLAY UNIT TEST

CLEAR I/O TEST GPS SENSOR TEST*
NETWORK SOUNDER TEST**
KEYBOARD & REMOTE TEST
TEST PATTERN
MEMORY DISPLAY UNIT (YES, NO)
CLEAR GPS SENSOR (YES, NO)*
NETWORK SOUNDER (YES, NO)**
HOT PAGE HOT PAGE SETUP (Configures HOT PAGE 1 to 5.)

& NAV DISP NAV DATA DISPLAY SETUP (Configures nav data displays.)
SETUP NAV GRAPHIC DISPLAY SETUP
GRAPHIC METER (COMPASS, WIND ANGLE)
DEPTH GRAPH UP-DATE (0.5, 1, 2, 4 s/dot)
TEMP GRAPH UP-DATE (0.5, 1, 2, 4 s/dot)
SIMULATION RADAR (BUILT IN DATA 1, BUILT IN DATA 2, USER DATA, LIVE)

SETUP PLOTTER (SIMULATION, LIVE)
SOUNDER (BUILT IN DATA, ETR DATA, LIVE)
SPEED (0.0-99.9 kt)
COURSE (8 FIGURE, DIRECTION 0.0-359.9°)
LATITUDE (90°0.0'N-90°0.0'S)
LONGITUDE (180°0.0'E-180°0.0'W)
START DATE & TIME (hh: mm dd. mmm. yy)
GET RADAR SIMULATION DATA (YES, NO)
* = Requires FURUNO BB GPS Receiver.

** = Requires Network Sounder ETR-6/10N, ETR-30N.
DATA UPLOAD/ DOWNLOAD WPT/ROUTE TO PC SELECT BPS soft key

TRANSFER DOWNLOAD (WAYPOINTS & ROUTES, 4800
DATA MARKS & LINES) 9600
UPLOAD WPT/ROUTE FROM PC 19200 (bps)
(WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
MARKS & LINES)
SAVE DATA TO MEMORY CARD
(TRACKS, MARKS & LINES,
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
SETTING DATA)
LOAD DATA FROM MEMORY CARD
(TRACKS, MARKS & LINES,
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES,
SETTING DATA, WALLPAPER)
RECEIVE YEOMAN DATA (Receive Yeoman data.)
RECEIVE DATA HOST NAME (NAVNET1, 2, 3, 4)

VIA NETWORK MARKS & LINES (ON, OFF)
WAYPOINTS & ROUTES (ON, OFF)
AP-4
APPENDIX
Plotter
MENU Key CHART SETUP CHART OFFSET (Offsets chart position.)
TRACKS OWN SHIP TRACK DISP (ON, OFF)

& MARKS OWN SHIP TRACK COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
CONTROL PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
TARGET TRACKS DISPLAY (ON, OFF, ARP ONLY, AIS ONLY, BOTH)
TARGET TRACK COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
INTERVAL (TIME, DISTANCE)
TIME INTERVAL (1 - 99m59s)
DISTANCE INTERVAL (0 - 99.99nm/km/sm)
MEMORY (TRACK & MARK) (0 - 8000 points)
TRACK soft key (RESUME, HALT)
ERASE T & M soft key
ERASE ALL TRACKS
ERASE TRACKS BY AREA
ERASE TRACKS BY COLOR
ERASE TARGET TRACKS
ERASE ALL MARKS/LINES
ERASE MARKS BY AREA
MARK SETUP soft key

MARKS/LINES COLOR (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE,
PURPLE, BLUE, WHITE)
MARKS SHAPE ( { ✕ )
= Default setting
LINES STYLE ( , , , )
MARKS SIZE (LARGE, SMALL)
CHART LAT/LON GRID (RED, YELLOW, GREEN, LIGHT BLUE, PURPLE,

CONFIG BLUE, WHITE, OFF)
(FURUNO, TEXT INFORMATION (ON, OFF)
NavChartsTM) WAYPOINTS (LARGE, SMALL, OFF)
WAYPOINT NAMES (ON, OFF)
Page 1 CHART BORDER LINES (ON, OFF)
LIGHT SECTOR INFO (ON, OFF)
Page 2 OBJECT INFORMATION (OFF, ALL ON, POINTS ON)
CHART DISPLAY (DETAILED, SIMPLE)
NAVAIDS SYMBOL (INTERNATIONAL, US)
CAUTION & ROUTING DATA (ON, OFF)
MARINE FEATURES (ON, OFF)
LAND FEATURES (ON, OFF)
CNTOUR LINE soft key

SPOT SOUNDINGS (ON, OFF)
SAFE CONTOUR SHADING (7, 16, 33, 66 ft)
DEPTH CONTOUR (ALL, 16, 33, 66 ft, OFF)
1 2
AP-5
APPENDIX
1 2
CHART PERSPECTIVE (ON, OFF)

DETAILS DE-CLUTTER (ON, OFF)
(C-MAP CHART DISPLAY MODE (FULL, SIMPLE, FISHING, LOW, CUSTOM)
chart) SAFETY STSTUS (ON, OFF)
(See page WAYPOINT (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
7-16.)
WAYPOINT NAME (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
Page 1 NAMES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
BUOYS NAME (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
NAV-AIDS (US, US SIMPLE, INT, INT SIMPLE, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
LIGHT SECTORS (ON, FLASHING, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
ATTENTION AREAS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
TIDES & CURRENTS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
Page 2 SEABED TYPE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
DEPTH CONFIG soft key
DEPTH SHADING CONFIRMATION PORTS & SERVICES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
(AUTO, MANUAL, NONE) TRACKS & ROUTE (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
DEPTH SHADING DISPLAY UNDERWATER OBJECTS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
(7, 18, 30, 60) RIVERS & LAKES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
DEPTH LINES & SPOT
LAND FEATURES (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
SOUNDINGS DISPLAY MODES
(PLOTTER/OVERLAY, LANDMARKS (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
PLOTTER, OFF) LAT/LON GRID (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
DEPTH LINES & SPOT CHART BOUNDARIES (ON, AUTO, PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
SOUNDING DISP MIXING (ON, OFF)
(0 to 99999 m/ft/fa/pb)
CHART LEVEL (LOCK, UNLOCK)
ROCKS BOTTOM TYPE DEPTH
VALUE-ADDED DATA (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
DISPLAY
(0 to 99999 m/ft/fa/pb) CAMERA ICON (PLOTTER/OVERLAY, PLOTTER, OFF)
DEPTH INFO soft key (See left margin.)
PLOTTER WAYPOINT SWITCHING (PERPENDICULAR, ARRVL ALM CRCL, MANUAL)

SETUP COURSE VECTOR (VECTOR, LINE, OFF)
SET GO TO METHOD (1 POINT, 35 POINTS, 35PTS/PORT SVC)
QP (EXT WPT (RMB), INTERNAL)
3 SAFE ROUTE CHECK (ON, OFF)*
POPUP INFO (OFF, ALL ON, POINTS ON)*
QPT/MARK SOFT KEY (QUICK POINT, MARK ENTRY)*
SHIP SHAPE (BOAT(L), BOAT(S), CIRCLE, CROSS)
D. BOX soft key (Same items as for D. BOX soft key on the RADAR
DISPLAY SETUP menu. See page AP-1.)
*: C-MAP only.
AP-6
APPENDIX
3
WAYPOINTS/ WAYPOINTS LOCAL LIST GO TO
ROUTES ALPHANUMERIC LIST NEW WPT
WAYPOINT BY CURSOR EDIT WPT
ERASE WPT
NEW WPT
WAYPOINT BY RNG & BRG NEW WPT
START POINT
ROUTES GO TO
NEW ROUTE
EDIT ROUTE
ERASE ROUTE
LOG RESTART
Destination is STOP/RELEASE
required.
RVRSE/FORWARD
SPEED (Speed for ETA, 0-99 kt, GPS or manual input)
COORD TYPE
CREATE NEW (BCKTRK TIME, BCKTRK DIST, MANUAL)

VOYAGE- SELECT ROUTE
BASED
ROUTE
FUNCTION SOFT KEY 1 - SOFT KEY 5

KEY SETUP* (OFF, ADD NEW WPT, MOVE WPT, RULER, GO TO WPT, GO TO
ROUTE, EDIT MK/LINE, TRACK ON/OFF, TTM ON/OFF, DEL TGT TRK,
ALPHA LIST, LOCAL LIST, ROUTE LIST, D. BOX ON/OFF,
CHANGE CNTRL, QUICK POINT)
(Assigns function of each plotter function key.)
* Defaut settings for function keys:
SOFT KEY 1, TRACK ON/OFF; SOFT KEY 2, EDIT MK/LINE;
SOFT KEY 3, RULER; SOFT KEY 4, ADD NEW WPT;
SOFT KEY 5, ALPHA LIST
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page AP-2.)
AP-7
APPENDIX
Sounder
MENU Key SOUNDER NOISE LIMITER (OFF, LOW, MEDIUM, HIGH)

MENU CLUTTER (0-16, AUTO)
WHITE MARKER (1-8 (8-color), 1-16 (16 color), OFF)
ZOOM MARKER (ON, OFF)
HUE (1-9)
SIGNAL LEVEL (OFF, SL1-SL3, 8 color, monochrome, SL1-SL6)
PICTURE ADVANCE (2/1, 1/1, 1/2, 1/4, 1/8, 1/16, STOP)
TEMPERATURE GRAPH (ON, OFF)
PRR LEVEL (0-20, SPD SENSING PRR)
D. BOX soft key (Same items as on RADAR DISPLAY SETUP menu. See page AP-1.)
SOUNDER FISH ALARM LEVEL (HIGH, MEDIUM, LOW)

SYSTEM TRANSMISSION (OFF, ON)
SETUP TVG-HF (0 - 9)
TVG-LF (0 - 9)
ECHO OFFSET-HF (-50 - +50)
ECHO OFFSET-LF (-50 - +50)
BOTTOM LEVEL-HF (-100 - +100)
BOTTOM LEVEL-LF (-100 - +100)
KP PULSE (INTERNAL, EXTERNAL)
SMOOTHING (OFF, SM1, SM2, SM3, SM4)
TLL OUTPUT (ON, OFF)
SENSOR SETUP soft key

SPEED CALIBRATION (-50 - +50%)
TEMP CALIBRATION (-40°F - +40°F)
DEPTH CALIBRATION ( -15 - +90 ft)
ACSTC SPD CALIBRATION (-500 - +500m/s)
SOUNDER RANGE 1 - RANGE 8*

RANGE ZOOM RANGE (2-120 m; 7-400 ft, 1-60 fa, 1-70 P/B)
SETUP BOTTOM LOCK RANGE (3 m, 6 m; 10 ft, 20 ft; 2 fa, 3 fa; 2 P/B, 3 P/B)
FUNCTION SOFT KEY 1- SOFT KEY 5

KEY SETUP# (OFF, AUTO MODE, GAIN HF, GAIN LF, SHIFT, NOISE LIMITER, CLUTTER,
WHITE MARKER, HUE, SIGNAL LEVEL, PICTURE ADV, TEMP. GRAPH, TVG HF,
TVG LF, OFFSET HF, OFFSET LF, SMOOTHING, ZOOM RANGE, B/L RANGE,
TLL OUTPUT, SNDR SOURCE, D. BOX ON/OFF, CHANGE CNTRL, SAVE
SCREEN, QUICK POINT)
(Assign function of echo sounder function key.)
SYSTEM CONFIGURATION (Same items as on page AP-2.)
* = Default sounder ranges

Range 8
Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 Range 6 Range 7 ETR-6/10N ETR-30N
5m 10 m 20 m 40 m 80 m 150 m 300 m 1200 m 1500 m

# Default settings for function keys:

SOFT KEY 1, TLL OUTPUT; SOFT KEY 2, CLUTTER; SOFT KEY 3, SIGNAL LEVEL;
SOFT KEY 4, NOISE LIMITER; SOFT KEY 5, PICTURE ADV
AP-8
APPENDIX
ALARM key
Radar Alarms
ALARM key SET GUARD 1 (ERASE GUARD 1)
SET GUARD 2 (ERASE GUARD 2)
Plotter Alarms
ALARM key AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)
ARRIVAL ALARM (ON, OFF)
ANCHOR WATCH ALARM (ON, OFF)
PROXIMITY ALARM (ON, OFF)
XTE ALARM (ON, OFF)
SPEED ALARM (WITHIN, UNDER/OVER, OFF)
TRIP ALARM (ON, OFF)
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)
GROUNDING ALARM*
GROUNDING ALARM RANGE*
NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)
CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.) *: C-MAP only
Sounder Alarms
ALARM key AUDIO ALARM (INT & EXT BUZZ, INTERNAL BUZZ, OFF)
BOTTOM ALARM (ON, OFF)
TEMPERATURE ALARM (WITHIN RANGE, OUT OF RANGE, OFF)
FISH ALARM (ON, OFF)
FISH ALARM (B/L) (ON, OFF)
NEXT INFO soft key (Shows which alarms have been violated.)
CLEAR ALARM soft key (Acknowledges violated alarm.)
AP-9
APPENDIX
Geodetic Chart List

001: WGS84 101: : Central America
002: WGS72 102: : Cuba
003: TOKYO : Mean Value (Japan, Korea, and Okinawa) 103: : Greenland
004: NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Mean Value (CONUS) 104: : Mexico
005: EUROPEAN 1950 : Mean Value 105: NORTH AMERICAN 1983 : Alaska
006: AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1984 : Australia and Tasmania Island 106: : Canada
007: ADINDAN : Mean Value (Ethiopia and Sudan) 107: : CONUS
008: : Ethiopia 108: : Mexico, Central America
009: : Mall 109: OBSERVATORIO 1966 : Corvo and Flores Islands (Azores)
010: : Senegal 110: OLD EGYPTIAN 1930 : Egypt
011: : Sudan 111: OLD HAWAIIAN : Mean Value
012: AFG : Somalia 112: : Hawaii
013: AIN EL ABD 1970 : Bahrain Island 113: : Kaual
014: ANNA 1 ASTRO 1965 : Cocos Island 114: : Maui
015: ARC 1950 : Mean Value 115: : Oahu
016: : Botswana 116: OMAN : Oman
017: : Lesotho 117: ORDNANCE SURVEY OF GREAT BRITAIN 1936 : Mean Value
018: : Malawi 118: : England
019: : Swaziland 119: : England, Isle of Man, and Wales
020: : Zaire 120: : Scotland and Shetland Islands
021: : Zambia 121: : Wales
022: : Zimbabwe 122: PICO DE LAS NIVIES : Canary Islands
023: ARC 1960 : Mean Value (Kenya, Tanzania) 123: PITCAIRN ASTRO 1967 : Pitcairn Island
024: : Kenya 124: PROVISIONAL SOUTH CHILEAN 1963 : South Chile (near 53° s)
025: : Tanzania 125: PROVISIONAL SOUTH AMERICAN 1956 : Mean Value
026: ASCENSION ISLAND 1958 : Ascension Island 126: : Bolivia
027: ASTRO BEACON "E" : Iwo Jima Island 127: : Chile Northern Chie (near 19° s)
028: ASTRO B4 SOR. ATOLL : Tem Island 128: : Chile Southern Chile (near 43° s)
029: ASTRO POS 71/4 : St. Helena Island 129: : Colombia
030: ASTRONOMIC STATION 1952 : Marcus Island 130: : Ecuador
031: AUSTRALIAN GEODETIC 1966 : Australia and Tasmania Island 131: : Guyana
032: BELLEVUE (IGN) : Efate and Erromango Islands 132: : Peru
033: BERMUDA 1957 : Bermuda Islands 133: : Venezuela
034: BOGOTA OBSERVATORY : Colombia 134: PUERTO RICO : Puerto Rico and Virgin Islands
035: CAMPO INCHAUSPE : Argentina 135: QATAR NATIONAL : Qatar
036: CANTON ISLAND 1966 : Phoenix Islands 136: QORNOQ : South Greenland
037: CAPE : South Africa 137: ROME 1940 : Sardinia Islands
038: CAPE CANAVERAL : Mean Value (Florida and Bahama Islands) 138: SANTNA BRAZ : Sao Maguel, Santa Maria Islands (Azores)
039: CARTHAGE : Tunisia 139: SANTO (DOS) : Espirito Santo Island
040: CHATHAM 1971 : Chatham Island (New Zealand) 140: SAPPER HILL 1943 : East Falkland Island
041: CHUA ASTRO : Paraguay 141: SOUTH AMERICAN 1969 : Mean Value
042: CORREGO ALEGRE : Brazil 142: : Argentina
043: DJAKARTA (BATAVIA) : Sumatra Island (Indonesia) 143: : Bolivia
044: DOS 1968 : Gizo Island (New Georgia Island) 144: : Brazil
045: EASTER ISLAND 1967 : Easter Island 145: : Chile
046: EUROPEAN 1950 (Cont'd) : Western Europe 146: : Colombia
047: : Cyprus 147: : Ecuador
048: : Egypt 148: : Guyana
049: : England, Scotland, Channel, and Shetland Islands 149: : Paraguay
050: : England,Ireland, Scotland, and Shetland Islands 150: : Peru
051: : Greece 151: : Trinidad and Tobago
052: : Iran 152: : Venezuela
053: : Italy Sardinia 153: SOUTH ASIA : Singapore
054: : Italy Sicily 154: SOUTHEAST BASE : Porto Santo and Medeira Islands
055: : Norway and Finland 155: SOUTHWEST BASE : Faial, Graciosa, Pico, Sao Jorge, and Terceira Islands
056: : Portugal and Spain 156: TIMBALAI 1948 : Brunel and East Malaysia (Sarawak and Sadah)
057: EUROPEAN 1979 : Mean Value 157: TOKYO : Japan
058: GANDAJIKA BASE : Republic of Maldives 158: : Korea
059: GEODETIC DATUM 1949 : New Zealand 159: : Okinawa
060: GUAM 1963 : Guam Island 160: TRISTAN ASTRO 1968 : Tristan da Cunha
061: GUX 1 ASTRO : Guadalcanal Island 161: VITI LEVU 1916 : Viti Levu Island (Fiji Islands)
062: HJORSEY 1955 : Iceland 162: WAKE-ENIWETOK 1960 : Marshall Islands
063: HONG KONG 1963 : Hong Kong 163: ZANDERIJ : Suriname
064: INDIAN : Thailand and Vietnam 164: BUKIT RIMPAH : Bangka and Belitung Islands (Indonesia)
065: : Bangladesh, India, and Nepal 165: CAMP AREA ASTRO : Camp Mcmurdo Area, Antarctica
066: IRELAND 1956 : Ireland 166: G. SEGARA : Kalimantan Islands(Indonesia)
067: ISTS 073 ASTRO 1969 : Diego Garcia 167: HERAT NORTH : Afghanistan
068: JHONSTON ISLAND 1961 : Johnston Island 168: HU-TZU-SHAN : Taiwan
069: KANDAWALA : Sri Lanka 169: TANANARIVE OBSERVATORY 1925 : Madagascar
070: KERGUELEN ISLAND : Kerguelen Island 170: YACARE : Uruguay
071: KERTAU 1948 : West Malaysia and Singapore 171: RT-90 : Sweden
072: LA REUNION : Mascarene Island 172 : Pulkovo 1942 : Russia
073: L.C. 5 ASTRO : Cayman Brac Island 173:: FINNISH KKJ: Finland
074: LIBERIA 1964 : Liberia
075: LUZON : Philippines (Excluding Mindanao Island)
076: : Mindanao Island
077: MAHE 1971 : Mahe Island
078: MARCO ASTRO : Salvage Islands
079: MASSAWA : Eritrea (Ethiopia)
080: MERCHICH : Morocco
081: MIDWAY ASTRO 1961 : Midway Island
082: MINNA : Nigeria
083: NAHRWAN : Masirah Island(Oman)
084: : United Arab Emirates
085: : Saudi Arabia
086: NAMIBIA : Namibia
087: MAPARIMA, BWI : Trinidad and Tobago
088: NORTH AMERICAN 1927 : Western United States
089: : Eastern United States
090: : Alaska
091: : Bahamas (Excluding San Salvador Island)
092: : Bahamas San Salvador Island
093: : Canada (Including Newfoundland Island)
094: : Alberta and British Columbia
095: : East Canada
096: : Manitoba and Ontario
097: : Northwest Territories and Saskatchewan
098: : Yukon
099: : Canal Zone
100: : Caribbean
AP-10
APPENDIX
Icons
Icon Meaning
North marker. Points to North.
Correct chart and suitable scale - full chart reliability.
Chart overenlarged.
Plotter, radar, sounder alarm setting violated.
Track is not being recorded or plotted.
Chart offset applied.
SA Voyage-based route currently being created.
VE
Latitude and longitude position offset applied.
Voltage of battery on circuit board in display unit is low. Contact your dealer about
replacement.
SI Simulation mode.
AP-11
APPENDIX
AP-12
SPECIFICATIONS OF MARINE RADAR
MODEL 1724C/1734C
1 GENERAL
1.1 Range, Pulselength (PL) & Pulse Repetition Rate (PRR)
Range (nm) Pulselength (μs) PRR (Hz approx.)
0.125 to 1.5 0.08 2100
1.5 to 3 0.3 1200
3 to 36* 0.8 600
*Maximum Range: M1724C: 24nm, M1734C: 36nm
1.2 Range Resolution All models: 21 m
1.3 Bearing Resolution M1724C: 6.7°, M1734C: 5.5°
1.4 Minimum Range M1724C: 27 m, M1734C: 35 m
1.5 Bearing Accuracy ±1°
1.6 Range Ring Accuracy 0.9% of range or 8 m, whichever is the greater
2 ANTENNA UNIT
2.1 MODEL1724C:
2.1.1 Radiator Micro-strip
2.1.2 Polarization Horizontal
2.1.3 Antenna Rotation 31/25 rpm nominal (for short/long range)
2.1.4 Radiator Length 45 cm
2.1.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 5.2°
2.1.6 Vertical Beamwidth 25°
2.1.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -20 dB
2.2 MODEL1734C:
2.2.1 Radiator Printed waveguide array
2.2.2 Polarization Horizontal
2.2.3 Antenna Rotation 24 rpm nominal
2.2.4 Radiator Length 60 cm
2.2.5 Horizontal Beamwidth 4°
2.2.6 Vertical Beamwidth 20°
2.2.7 Sidelobe Attenuation -18 dB
SP-1
3 TRANSCEIVER MODULE
3.1 Frequency and Modulation 9410 MHz ±30MHz (X band), P0N
3.2 Peak Output Power M1724C: 2 kW nominal,
M1734C: 4 kW nominal,
3.3 Modulator FET Switching Method
3.4 Intermediate Frequency 60 MHz
3.5 Tuning Automatic
3.6 Receiver Front End MIC (Microwave IC)
3.7 Bandwidth 7 MHz
3.8 Duplexer Circulator with diode limiter
3.9 Warming up M1724C: 60 s approx, M1734C: 90 s approx.
4 DISPLAY UNIT
4.1 Display 7-inch rectangular color LCD, 480(H) x 640(V) dots,
Effective radar display area: 432 x 432 mm
4.2 Range, Range Ring Interval (RI), Number of Rings
Range (nm) 0.125 0.25 0.5 0.75 1 1.5 2 3 4 6 8 12 16 24 36
RI (nm) 0.0625 0.125 0.125 0.25 0.25 0.5 0.5 1 1 2 2 3 4 6 12
Rings 2 2 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 3 4 4 4 4 3
Maximum range: M1724C: 24nm, M1734C: 36nm
4.3 Markers Heading Line, Bearing Scale, Range Rings,
Variable Range Marker (VRM), Electronic Bearing Line (EBL),
Alarm Zone, Waypoint Mark (navigation input required)
4.4 Alphanumeric Indications Range, Range Ring Interval, Interference Rejection (IR),
Variable Range Marker (VRM), Electronic Bearing Line (EBL),
Stand-by (ST-BY), Echo Averaging (EAV), TX Pulse width
Guard Alarm (G(IN), G(OUT)), Echo Stretch (ES),
Range and Bearing to Cursor or Cursor Position,
Echo Trailing (TRAIL), Trailing Time,
Data Box (Position, COG, SOG, STW, etc. selectable on menu)
4.5 Input Data IEC 61162-1 (NMEA 0183 Ver1.5/2.0)
Own ship’s position: GGA>RMC>RMA>GLL
Ship’s speed: RMC>RMA>VTG>VHW
Bearing (True): HDT>HDG*1>HDM*1
Course: RMC>RMA>VTG
Water depth: DPT>DBT
Wind: MWV>VWT>VWR
Water Temperature: MTW
*1
Time: ZDA : calculated by magnetic deviation
SP - 2
4.6 Output Data
Alarm signal 12 VDC, 100 mA or less
NMEA 0183 Ver1.5 GGA, GLL, RMA, RMC, GTD, VTG, ZDA (GPS data required)
RMB, WPL, BWC or BWR, APB, AAM, BOD, XTE, VHW, MTW,
DPT or DBT, HDT, HDG, MWV, ZTG
TLL (L/L, Heading data required), TTM (ARPA required)
5 PLOTTER FUNCTION
5.1 Projection Mercator
5.2 Usable Area 85 latitude or below
5.3 Effective Area 133.4 x 97.3 mm
5.4 Display pixels 480 x 640 dots
5.5 Position Indication Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP, DECCA LOP or MGRS
5.6 Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 2,048 nm (at equatorial area)
5.7 Track Display Plot interval: by time (1 sec. to 99 min. 99 sec.) or
by distance (0 to 99.99 nm)
5.8 Track Colors Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white
5.9 Memory Capacity Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points
5.10 Storage Capacity Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each
5.11 MOB 1 point
5.12 Quick Routes 1 course with 35 waypoints max.
5.13 Electronic Chart SD Card: NAVIONICS Gold Chart card, or
C-MAP NT MAX chart card
5.14 Alarms Arrival and Anchor watch, Cross track error and proximity
alarms, Ship’s speed in and out alarms, Water temperature,
Trip alarm, Fish alarm, Bottom alarm (ETR required), Grounding
alarm (C-MAP only)
6 POWER SUPPLY
6.1 Rated Voltage/Current
M1724C 12-24 VDC: 5.9-2.8 A
M1734C 12-24 VDC: 5.6-2.7 A
6.2 Rectifier (option) PR-62: 100/110/115/220/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
SP - 3
7 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
7.1 Ambient Temperature Antenna Unit: -25°C to +70°C
Display Unit: -15°C to +55°C
Remote Controller: +5°C to +45°C
7.2 Relative Humidity 93 % or less at +40°C
7.3 Waterproofing Antenna Unit: IPX6
Display Unit: IPX5 (External monitor connected: IPX0)
Remote Controller: IPX0
7.4 Vibration 2 Hz-5Hz to 13.2 Hz: Amplitude: ±1 mm ±10%
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz: Max. acceleration 7m/s2, fixed
8 COATING COLOR
8.1 Display Unit N3.0
8.2 Antenna Unit N9.5 (upper), 2.5PB3.5/10 (lower)
SP - 4
SPECIFICATIONS OF VIDEO PLOTTER GD-1720C
1 PLOTTER FUNCTION
1.1 Projection Mercator
1.2 Usable Area 85 latitude or below
1.3 Effective Area 1933.4 x 97.3 mm
1.4 Display pixels 480 x 640 dots
1.5 Position Indication Latitude/longitude, Loran C LOP, DECCA LOP or MGRS
1.6 Effective Projection Area 0.125 nm to 2,048 nm (at equatorial area)
1.7 Track Display Plot interval: by time (1 sec. to 99 min. 99 sec.) or
by distance (0 to 99.99 nm)
1.8 Colors Red, yellow, green purple, light-blue, blue, white
1.9 Memory Capacity Track/mark: 8000 points, Waypoint: 999 points
1.10 Storage Capacity Simple route: 200 routes with 35 waypoints each
1.11 MOB 1 point
1.12 Quick Routes 1 course with 35 waypoints max.
1.13 Electronic Chart SD card - FURUNO or NAVIONICS Gold Chart card, or
C-MAP NT MAX chart card
1.13.1 Alarms Arrival and Anchor watch, Cross track error and proximity
alarms, Ship’s speed in and out alarms, Water temperature,
Trip alarm, Fish alarm, Bottom alarm (ETR required), Grounding
alarm
2 POWER SUPPLY
2.1 Rated Voltage/Current 12-24 VDC: 2.1-1.0 A
2.2 Rectifier (option) PR-62: 100/110/115/220/230 VAC, 1 phase, 50/60 Hz
3 ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITION
3.1 Ambient Temperature -15°C to +55°C
3.2 Relative Humidity 93% or less at +40°C
3.3 Waterproofing IPX5
3.4 Vibration 2 Hz-5Hz to 13.2 Hz: Amplitude: ±1 mm ±10%
13.2 Hz to 100 Hz: Max. acceleration 7m/s2, fixed
4 COATING COLOR
4.1 Display Unit N3.0
SP - 5
INDEX
Ａ Arrival alarm ............................................. 3-49
A/C RAIN.....................................................2-4 A-scope display .......................................... 4-5
A/C SEA ......................................................2-3 Audio alarm .............................................. 3-49
ACQ soft key .............................................2-29 Auto course-up mode ................................. 3-8
AIS AUTO S.SPD soft key .............................. 2-15
lost target ................................................5-5 AUTO/D. BOX soft key ............................... 4-7
number of targets to display....................5-3
Ｂ
past position display................................5-8
Battery replacement ................................... 8-2
proximity alarm........................................5-6
Bearing measurement by EBL ................. 2-11
symbols ...................................................5-3
Bearing reference ....................................... 7-4
target data ...............................................5-4
Bottom alarm ............................................ 4-16
turning on/off ...........................................5-1
Bottom discrimination display..................... 4-5
turning track on/off ..................................5-7
Bottom echo ............................................. 4-21
vector time...............................................5-7
Bottom-lock display .................................... 4-4
ALARM key
Bottom-zoom display .................................. 4-4
plotter ....................................................3-49
Brilliance ..................................................... 1-6
radar......................................................2-24
sounder .................................................4-15 Ｃ
Alarms CHART DETAILS menu............................ 7-15
anchor watch.........................................3-51 CHART OFFSET soft key......................... 7-14
arrival ....................................................3-49 Charts
audio .....................................................3-49 cursor and data display (C-MAP) ......... 3-14
bottom ...................................................4-16 data for aids to navigation .................... 3-11
CPA/TCPA..................................... 2-35, 5-5 icon data (C-MAP) ................................ 3-14
fish.........................................................4-16 icons ....................................................... 3-9
fish(B/L).................................................4-17 indices .................................................. 3-10
guard .....................................................2-24 inserting .................................................. 1-4
lost target ..............................................2-36 Navionics GOLD chart attributes.......... 7-15
messages..............................................3-56 offsetting ............................................... 7-14
messages (plotter) ................................3-55 port service icons.................................. 3-11
messages (sounder) .............................4-18 tide information (C-MAP) ...................... 3-16
proximity................................................3-53 CLEAR ALARM soft key ........................... 4-18
speed ....................................................3-52 Clutter rejector .......................................... 4-10
trip .........................................................3-53 C-MAP charts
water temperature.................................4-17 cursor and data display ........................ 3-14
XTE (cross track error)..........................3-52 icon data ............................................... 3-14
Anchor watch alarm ..................................3-51 tide information ..................................... 3-15
Antenna height (FURUNO BB CNTRL PLOTTR soft key ......................... 1-10
GPS Receiver) ......................................7-28 CNTRL SNDR soft key ............................. 1-10
ARP Cold start (FURUNO BB GPS
acquisition of targets .............................2-29 receiver)................................................ 7-28
activating ...............................................2-29 Colors
ARP SETUP menu................................2-29 radar display ........................................... 7-6
CPA/TCPA alarm........................... 2-35, 5-5 radar echoes........................................... 7-6
data .......................................................2-34 sounder echoes .................................... 4-14
deactivating ...........................................2-29 Compass display ........................................ 3-3
lost target alarm ....................................2-36 Controls
past position display...................... 2-33, 5-8 display unit.............................................. 1-1
test ..........................................................8-8 remote controller..................................... 1-3
tracking termination...............................2-31 Course-up mode
vector ....................................................2-32 plotter...................................................... 3-8
IN-1
IN-1
INDEX
radar........................................................2-8 Echo trails

CPA/TCPA alarm................................2-35, 5-5 color...................................................... 2-20
Cursor starting.................................................. 2-19
display format..........................................7-5 time....................................................... 2-19
shifting...................................................1-12 EDIT XT-LMT soft key ......................... 3-4, 3-6
Cursor pad Error messages ........................................ 8-13
operation ...............................................1-12 ETA calculation ......................................... 3-47
CURSOR soft key .....................................2-14
Ｆ
Ｄ Fish alarm
Data boxes sensitivity.............................................. 7-33
erasing ..................................................1-14 setting................................................... 4-16
hiding ....................................................1-14 Fish alarm (B/L)........................................ 4-17
rearranging............................................1-14 Fish school echo ...................................... 4-22
setup .....................................................7-22 Fix mode (FURUNO BB GPS
showing.................................................1-14 Receiver) .............................................. 7-28
Depth measurement ...................................4-9 Formatting memory cards .......................... 6-1
Depth source...............................................7-4 FREQ LF/HF soft key ................................. 4-2
Depth unit....................................................7-3 Function keys
Diagnostics function execution ................................ 1-15
ARP test..................................................8-8 setup (plotter) ........................................7-11
display unit test .......................................8-7 setup (radar)........................................... 7-8
GPS sensor test (F'URUNO BB setup (sounder) .................................... 7-38
GPS receiver) .....................................8-7 FURUNO BB GPS receiver setup ............ 7-26
keyboard test ........................................8-10 Fuse replacement....................................... 8-2
network sounder test...............................8-8
test menu ................................................8-6
Ｇ
test pattern ..............................................8-8 GAIN key
DISP key .....................................................1-9 radar ....................................................... 2-2
Display modes ............................................1-8 sounder .................................................. 4-8
Display unit test...........................................8-7 GENERAL SETUP menu ........................... 7-1
DISPLY MODE soft key ..............................4-1 Geodetic datum (FURUNO BB
Downloading data .......................................6-4 GPS receiver)....................................... 7-26
Geodetic datum codes ...........................AP-10
Ｅ
GPS sensor (FURUNO BB
E. AVG soft key .........................................2-22
GPS receiver) test .................................. 8-7
E. STR soft key .........................................2-21
GPS SETUP menu................................... 7-26
EBL soft key .............................................. 2-11
GPS status display ....................................8-11
EBL/VRM key................ 2-10, 2-11, 2-16, 2-18
Grounding alarm
Echo averaging .........................................2-22
report .................................................... 3-56
Echo offset (sounder)................................7-34
setting................................................... 3-54
Echo stretch ..............................................2-21
Guard alarm
cancelling ..............................................2-25
Ｉ
setting ...................................................2-24 I. REJ. soft key ......................................... 2-13
Icons.............................................................11
Ｈ Interference rejection
Heading line ..............................................2-12 radar ..................................................... 2-13
Head-up mode ............................................2-8 sounder ................................................ 4-10
Highway display ..........................................3-6
HIWAY CNTRL soft key ..............................3-6
Ｋ
HL OFF soft key ........................................2-12 Keyboard test ........................................... 8-10
Hot page setup..........................................7-23 Keying pulse............................................. 7-34
Hue Ｌ
radar, plotter............................................1-7 Language ................................................... 7-2
sounder .................................................4-14 Latitude, longitude display.......................... 7-4
IN-2
INDEX
Lines Network sounder test.................................. 8-8

entering .................................................3-24 NEXT INFO soft key ........................ 3-55, 4-18
erasing ..................................................3-26 Noise limiter (sounder) ............................. 4-10
type .......................................................3-25 Noise rejection (radar) .............................. 2-12
LOAD DATA menu ......................................6-3 North marker............................................. 2-12
Lost target alarm .......................................2-36 North-up mode
plotter...................................................... 3-8
Ｍ radar ....................................................... 2-8
Magnetic variation.......................................7-4
Maintenance Ｏ
battery replacement ................................8-2 Offset EBL ................................................ 2-16
fuse replacement ....................................8-2 OFFSET soft key ............................. 2-16, 2-17
preventive................................................8-1
Marker-zoom display...................................4-3
Ｐ
Marks Picture advance speed ............................. 4-12
color ......................................................3-24 PLOTTER SETUP menu .......................... 7-10
entering .................................................3-24 Port, port services
erasing all..............................................3-26 icons ..................................................... 3-11
erasing individual ..................................3-26 Position smoothing (FURUNO BB
shape ....................................................3-24 GPS receiver) ....................................... 7-27
Memory POWER/BRILL key ............................. 1-5, 1-6
clearing..................................................8-12 Presentation mode
testing......................................................8-6 plotter...................................................... 3-8
Memory cards radar ....................................................... 2-7
error messages .......................................6-2 Proximity alarm
formatting ................................................6-1 AIS.......................................................... 5-6
playing back ............................................6-3 plotter.................................................... 3-53
saving data to..........................................6-2 Pulselength (radar) ..................................... 2-6
Memory I/O test ..........................................8-6 Ｒ
Messages Racon ....................................................... 2-39
memory cards .........................................6-2 RADAR SETTING menu ............................ 7-4
plotter alarms ........................................3-55 RADAR TX/ST-BY soft key......................... 2-2
sounder alarms .....................................4-18 Range
MOB mark .................................................1-13 measurement by cursor (radar) .............. 2-9
Multiple echoes (radar) .............................2-37 measurement by range rings (radar)...... 2-9
Ｎ measurement by VRM (radar) .............. 2-10
Nav data display..........................................3-7 plotter...................................................... 3-9
NAV DATA menu .......................................7-32 radar ....................................................... 2-5
Nav data window.........................................3-1 setup (radar) ........................................... 7-7
Nav graphic display setup (sounder) .................................... 7-37
anemometer display................................3-5 unit of measurement............................... 7-2
compass display......................................3-3 RANGE key
NAV OPTION menu ..................................7-24 plotter...................................................... 3-9
Navigation radar ....................................................... 2-5
canceling route navigation ....................3-48 sounder................................................... 4-7
port, port services .................................3-43 Remote controller
quick point .............................................3-41 control description .................................. 1-3
restarting ...............................................3-46 testing ................................................... 8-10
routes ....................................................3-45 RESET XTE soft key ........................... 3-4, 3-6
switching waypoints in a route ..............3-47 RINGS soft key........................................... 2-9
waypoints ..............................................3-43 Routes
Navigator setup ............................... 7-24, 7-26 cancelling navigation of ........................ 3-48
NavNet connecting ............................................ 3-38
image source ........................................ 1-11 entering with cursor .............................. 3-36
receiving data from..................................6-8 entering with existing waypoints ........... 3-35
erasing.................................................. 3-41
IN-3
IN-3
INDEX
following ................................................3-45 erasing own ship's by color .................. 3-23

inserting waypoint from plotter memory distribution setting .................. 3-21
display...............................................3-40 plotting interval ..................................... 3-20
inserting waypoint from route list ..........3-39 plotting method..................................... 3-20
removing waypoint from........................3-41 plotting of own ship's ............................ 3-19
voyage based........................................3-36 TRACK HALT soft key .............................. 3-19
TRACK RESUME soft key ....................... 3-19
Ｓ TRAIL COLOR soft key ............................ 2-20
SART ........................................................2-38 TRAIL ON/OFF soft key ........................... 2-19
Satellite disable (FURUNO BB TRAIL soft key .......................................... 2-18
GPS receiver) .......................................7-28 TRAIL TIME soft key ................................ 2-18
SAVE DATA menu.......................................6-1 Trip alarm ................................................. 3-53
SAVE/MOB key.........................................1-13 Trip distance resetting .............................. 3-57
Sensor setup.............................................7-34 Troubleshooting
SENSOR SETUP menu............................7-36 general ................................................... 8-3
SENSOR SETUP soft key ........................7-34 plotter ..................................................... 8-4
Shadow sector ..........................................2-38 radar ....................................................... 8-3
Shift sounder .................................................. 8-5
automatic (radar)...................................2-16 True motion mode ...................................... 2-8
manual (radar) ......................................2-15 Tuning......................................................... 2-2
sounder ...................................................4-8 TVG .......................................................... 7-34
SHIFT soft key ...................................2-15, 4-8 Tx sector (radar)......................................... 7-5
Sidelobe echoes .......................................2-37
Signal level erasure (sounder) .................. 4-11 Ｕ
SIM SETUP menu.....................................1-16 Uploading data ........................................... 6-4
Simulation display .....................................1-16
Smoothing echoes (sounder)....................7-34
Ｖ
Soft keys .....................................................1-2 Vector (ARP) ............................................ 2-32
Speed alarm..............................................3-52 Virtual image ............................................ 2-37
Speed display..............................................7-4 VRM (Variable Range Marker)
Speed/course smoothing (FURUNO BB radar ..................................................... 2-10
GPS receiver) .......................................7-27 sounder .................................................. 4-9
SPLIT soft key.............................................4-6 VRM soft key ............................................ 2-10
System configuration .................................... ix Ｗ
SYSTEM SETUP menu (sounder)............7-33 W. MAN soft key....................................... 2-26
Ｔ Watchman ................................................ 2-25
TARGET INFO soft key.............................2-34 Water temperature alarm.......................... 4-17
TARGET soft key ......................................2-18 Water temperature graph ......................... 4-19
TD display ...................................................7-3 Water temperature unit............................... 7-4
TD setup Waypoint marker (radar)........................... 2-27
Decca....................................................7-31 Waypoints
Loran C .................................................7-30 changing size ....................................... 3-33
TD SETUP menu ......................................7-29 color...................................................... 3-28
Test menu ...................................................8-6 editing from waypoint list ...................... 3-30
Test pattern .................................................8-8 editing waypoint position ...................... 3-31
Time measurement (sounder).....................4-9 editing with cursor ................................ 3-31
Time notation ..............................................7-4 entering at own ship position................ 3-27
TLL data output (radar) .............................2-23 entering by range and bearing ............. 3-29
TLL OUTPUT key......................................2-23 entering with cursor .............................. 3-27
Track erasing from the menu ......................... 3-32
displaying other targets' .................3-18, 5-7 erasing from waypoint list..................... 3-32
displaying own ship's ............................3-18 erasing with cursor ............................... 3-32
erasing all own ship's............................3-23 loading from Yeoman.............................. 6-7
erasing all targets’ ..............................3-23 navigating to ......................................... 3-43
erasing own ship's by area ...................3-22 searching.............................................. 3-34
IN-4
INDEX
shape ....................................................3-28
switching in route navigation.................3-47
White marker.............................................4-12
Wind display................................................3-5
WPT MK soft key ......................................2-27
Ｘ
XTE (cross track error) alarm....................3-52
XTE monitor ........................................ 3-4, 3-6
Ｙ
Yeoman .......................................................6-7
Ｚ
Zero line ....................................................4-20
Zoom .........................................................2-14
ZOOM/D. BOX soft key.............................2-14
IN-5
IN-5

7 Navnet Vx2 Operators Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

7 Navnet Vx2 Operators Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

7 Navnet Vx2 Operators Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IMPORTANT NOTICES

How to discard this product

How to discard a used battery

Prevent the potential risk of Note: If the antenna unit is installed at a

Continued use of the equipment can cause

Heat can alter equipment shape and melt

1. OPERATIONAL OVERVIEW ................................................................................. 1-1

2. RADAR OPERATION ............................................................................................ 2-1

2.13 Reducing Noise Interference.............................................................................................2-12

3.5.4 C-MAP charts ....................................................................................................... 3-14

4. VIDEO SOUNDER OPERATION ........................................................................... 4-1

4.3.4 Shifting the range ....................................................................................................4-8

5. AIS OPERATION ...................................................................................................5-1

7. CUSTOMIZING YOUR UNIT..................................................................................7-1

7.2.3 Function key setup ................................................................................................. 7-8

8. MAINTENANCE, TROUBLESHOOTING .............................................................. 8-1

SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................................................... SP-1

INDEX ......................................................................................................................... IN-1

Thank you for considering and purchasing FURUNO.

The main features are as follows:

NavNet system (Model 1724C/1734C)

NavNet system (Model 1724C/1734C)

Single-unit NavNet system (GD-1720C)

Network sounder 100/110/115/220/230 VAC

Two-unit NavNet system

Two-unit NavNet system

Three-or-more-unit NavNet system (Max. 4 display units)

Radar data Plotter data

Note: The picture disappears

Three-or-more-unit NavNet system

COMPLIANCE WITH R&TTE DIRECTIVE

1.1 Operating Controls

Selects display mode. Cursor pad

1.1.2 Remote controller

RANGE DISP MOB Replace the batteries (AA) when the

Note: The remote controller may

BRILL TONE TX/STBY ACQ

SK1 SK2 SK3 SK4 SK5

1.2 Inserting a Chart Card

1. Open the chart drive.

To remove chart card, follow the steps shown below.

1.3 Turning the Unit On/Off

1.4 Display Brilliance, Panel Brilliance, Hue

1.4.1 Display brilliance, panel brilliance

Current selection is higtlighted.

.250/SP.125nm 319.9°M BRILL

Brilliance adjustment soft keys

DISPLAY BRILLIANCE PANEL BRILLIANCE

Display brilliance and panel brilliance windows

1. Press the POWER/BRILL key momentarily.

Night Day Twilight

1.5 Selecting a Display

Full screen Combination screen Overlay screen

Plotter, radar, sounder, Plotter, radar, sounder, Radar + plotter

1.5.2 Selecting a display

· TURN KNOB TO SELECT MODE

Display screen selection window

PUSH ENTER KNOB.

Radar combination screen selection window